WO2024067648A1 - Communication method and related product - Google Patents

Communication method and related product Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024067648A1
WO2024067648A1 PCT/CN2023/121793 CN2023121793W WO2024067648A1 WO 2024067648 A1 WO2024067648 A1 WO 2024067648A1 CN 2023121793 W CN2023121793 W CN 2023121793W WO 2024067648 A1 WO2024067648 A1 WO 2024067648A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
moment
frequency domain
phase difference
downlink reference
reference signal
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/121793
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
胡辰
刘显达
蔡世杰
刘鹍鹏
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2024067648A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024067648A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/02Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by diversity reception
    • H04L1/06Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by diversity reception using space diversity
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0453Resources in frequency domain, e.g. a carrier in FDMA

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and related products.
  • TDD time-division duplex
  • mMIMO massive multiple-input multiple-output
  • network devices need to obtain downlink channel state information (CSI) to calculate the weight of downlink data transmission to achieve high-speed downlink data transmission.
  • CSI downlink channel state information
  • network equipment can estimate the uplink CSI by measuring the sounding reference signal (SRS) sent by the terminal device, and obtain the downlink CSI at the same time based on the channel reciprocity of TDD mMIMO.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • CSI aging refers to the change of the channel over time.
  • the downlink channel used for downlink data transmission at a future moment is different from the CSI obtained based on SRS and channel reciprocity at the current moment.
  • the CSI is inaccurate, affecting the performance of data transmission.
  • network equipment needs to estimate the uplink CSI based on the SRS at multiple moments in the past, analyze the law of CSI change over time, and predict the downlink CSI at future moments.
  • the SRS sent by the terminal device will deviate from the actual SRS, resulting in low accuracy of the uplink CSI estimated by the network device, making it difficult for the network device to analyze how the CSI changes over time, thereby reducing the performance of the network device's channel prediction.
  • the embodiments of the present application disclose a communication method and related products, which can improve the performance of channel prediction.
  • an embodiment of the present application discloses a communication method, the method comprising: based on at least one first port set, receiving a downlink reference signal at a first moment and a second moment respectively; the first port set comprises one or more antenna ports; sending feedback information, the feedback information being used to indicate a plurality of phase difference feedback amounts; each of the phase difference feedback amounts corresponds to one of the at least one first port set; the phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signal received by the corresponding antenna port in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment.
  • the antenna port may be a physical antenna port or a virtual logical antenna port. It is understandable that if the terminal device includes only one first port set, the first port set may correspond to multiple phase difference feedback amounts indicated by the feedback information, and if the terminal device includes two or more first port sets, each first port set may correspond to one or more phase difference feedback amounts.
  • the first port set may also correspond to one phase difference feedback amount, and correspondingly, the above feedback information may be used to indicate the phase difference feedback amount.
  • the first port set includes one antenna port or includes multiple antenna ports with coherence capability. If the channel corresponding to each antenna port in the first port set has the same or similar time-varying law, then the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals corresponding to each antenna port at different times (such as the first time and the second time) is also the same or similar, so the above feedback information may include only one phase difference feedback amount, which is used to indicate the above same or similar phase difference information, so as to reduce the feedback overhead of the phase difference feedback amount.
  • phase information not only includes the random phase information generated by the hardware of the terminal device transmitter (such as the opening/closing of the RF link, the change of the transmission power of the RF link, etc.), but also includes the phase change caused by the change of the channel itself over time.
  • the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals indicated by the above phase difference feedback amount can reflect the change of the downlink channel itself corresponding to the antenna port in the first port set between the first moment and the second moment.
  • the change of the downlink channel itself between the first moment and the second moment can be equivalent to the change of the uplink channel itself between the first moment and the second moment.
  • the phase change caused by the change of the uplink channel itself over time in the uplink channel estimation result can be excluded, and then the above random phase information caused by the hardware of the terminal device transmitter can be determined, which helps to improve the accuracy of channel prediction.
  • each of the phase difference feedback amounts is used to indicate the first end corresponding to it.
  • the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment includes at least one of the following items: the phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the corresponding antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment; the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals is the phase information of the cross-correlation of the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment; the phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the channels of the corresponding antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment; the phase difference information between the channels is the phase information of the cross-correlation of the channels at the first moment and the channels at the second moment; the channel at the first moment is determined based on the downlink reference signal received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment,
  • the cross-correlation can be used to indicate the similarity between the measurement signal (such as the downlink reference signal or the estimated channel) at the first moment and the second moment.
  • the phase information of the cross-correlation of the downlink reference signal is the phase difference between the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the second moment calculated based on the cross-correlation algorithm.
  • the phase information of the cross-correlation of the channel is the phase difference between the channel at the first moment and the second moment calculated based on the cross-correlation algorithm.
  • the phase information of the mutual correlation of the downlink reference signals at different times is fed back, which can shorten the calculation process of the phase difference feedback amount and reduce the calculation overhead.
  • the phase information of the mutual correlation of the channels at different times is fed back, wherein the channel at the first moment and the channel at the second moment can be represented by the corresponding CSI estimation result or channel coefficient (the channel coefficient can be a partial coefficient in the CSI estimation result).
  • the phase information of the mutual correlation of the above channels can be used to represent the phase difference information between the CSI estimation result at the first moment and the CSI estimation result at the second moment, and the phase difference feedback amount is determined based on the phase difference information. If a channel coefficient that is less affected by the noise interference generated by other signal characteristics in the CSI is selected, the influence of noise interference can be reduced, and the accuracy of the phase difference feedback amount can be further improved.
  • the method further includes: based on the at least one first port set, sending SRS at a third moment and a fourth moment; the time interval between the first moment and the third moment is a first time difference, and the time interval between the second moment and the fourth moment is a second time difference; the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to one third moment and one fourth moment.
  • the sending time and receiving time of the downlink reference signal are described as the first time and the second time.
  • the sending time and receiving time of the SRS are described as the third time and the fourth time.
  • the first time, the second time, the third time, and the fourth time can also be a time unit, such as the first time unit, the second time unit, the third time unit, and the fourth time unit. Specifically, it can be one OFDM symbol or two OFDM symbols. Other descriptions of time in this application can also be the time units described above.
  • the first time difference is less than a first threshold, and the second time difference is less than the first threshold; or, the first time difference is less than or equal to the first threshold, and the second time difference is less than or equal to the first threshold.
  • the time interval between the sending moment of the downlink reference signal and the sending moment of the SRS should be as small as possible, that is, the first time difference and the second time difference should be as small as possible. Therefore, this embodiment constrains the first time difference and the second time difference by setting a time upper limit (first threshold), which can avoid the problem of low accuracy of the phase difference feedback amount caused by the above-mentioned time interval being too long.
  • the time lower limit of the above-mentioned first time difference and the above-mentioned second time difference can be determined based on the constraints of the communication protocol frame structure, and the constraints of the downlink reference signal processing timing (such as the timing constraints of determining the phase difference feedback amount based on the downlink reference signal, or the timing constraints of determining the corresponding channel based on the downlink reference signal).
  • the first threshold satisfies any one of the following: the first threshold is equal to one quarter of the third time difference, and the third time difference is the time interval between the third moment and the fourth moment; the first threshold is equal to one fifth of the third time difference; the first threshold is equal to one eighth of the third time difference; the first threshold is equal to 5 time slots; the first threshold is equal to 2 time slots; the first threshold is equal to 1 time slot.
  • the time slot can be determined based on the subcarrier spacing. For example, under the specifications of the fifth-generation (5th-generation, 5G) new radio (new radio, NR) standard, if the subcarrier spacing is 15KHz, the corresponding time slot can be 1 millisecond, and if the subcarrier spacing is 30KHz, the corresponding time slot can be 0.5 milliseconds.
  • 5th-generation, 5G fifth-generation new radio
  • NR new radio
  • the phase difference feedback amount is used to compensate for a difference between a random phase corresponding to the SRS sent at the third moment and a random phase corresponding to the SRS sent at the fourth moment.
  • each phase difference feedback amount can be used to compensate for the difference between the random phase corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the random phase corresponding to the fourth moment corresponding to the first port set, the second port set and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set.
  • the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to a second port set; the second port The set includes one or more downlink reference signal ports; the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to a first frequency domain position set or corresponds to a first frequency domain basis set; the first frequency domain position set includes one or more frequency domain positions, and the first frequency domain basis set includes one or more frequency domain bases.
  • the above-mentioned downlink reference signal port can be used to send a downlink reference signal.
  • the first frequency domain position set can be a set consisting of a set of frequency domain subcarrier indices, each frequency domain subcarrier index corresponds to a frequency domain position, and the downlink reference signal or estimated channel on the corresponding frequency domain subcarrier can be obtained through the frequency domain subcarrier index to calculate the phase difference feedback amount.
  • the downlink reference signal or estimated channel corresponding to the specified frequency domain index can be extracted in the frequency domain to calculate the phase difference feedback amount.
  • the frequency domain basis refers to that for multiple frequency domain positions within a frequency domain bandwidth, the reference signal vector or channel vector of the above frequency domain position is multiplied by a specific transformation matrix to obtain a reference signal vector in a transform domain or a channel vector in a transform domain.
  • Each column of the transformation matrix is called a frequency domain basis.
  • the transformation matrix can be a discrete Fourier transform (DFT) matrix.
  • the frequency domain basis set can include one or more columns of the transformation matrix.
  • the reference signal vector or channel vector of the frequency domain position can be first multiplied by one or more columns of the selected transformation matrix to obtain a reference signal vector in a transform domain or a channel vector in a transform domain, and then the correlation calculation is performed based on the reference signal vector or channel vector in the transform domain.
  • the second port set corresponding to each phase difference feedback amount may be different, and the corresponding first frequency domain position set or first frequency domain basis set may also be different.
  • any two of the multiple phase difference feedback amounts satisfy at least one of the following: the first port sets corresponding to the any two phase difference feedback amounts are different; the second port sets corresponding to the any two phase difference feedback amounts are different; the first frequency domain position sets or first frequency domain basis sets corresponding to the any two phase difference feedback amounts are different.
  • a phase difference feedback amount can be uniquely determined. Accordingly, if any one or more of the first port set, the second port set and the first frequency domain position set/first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the two phase difference feedback amounts are different, the two phase difference feedback amounts are different.
  • the multiple phase difference feedback amounts indicated by the above feedback information can be different (i.e., for the same channel, only one phase difference feedback amount is fed back) to reduce the additional overhead caused by repeated feedback.
  • the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment includes the second port set, and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment includes the second port set;
  • the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set, and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set;
  • the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the third moment includes the first port set, and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment includes the first port set;
  • the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the third moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set, and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set
  • the set of transmitting antenna ports corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the set of transmitting antenna ports corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment may be the same or different.
  • the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment may be the same or different.
  • the set of transmitting antenna ports corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the set of transmitting antenna ports corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment may be the same or different.
  • the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment may be the same or different. No limitation is made here.
  • the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal needs to include the above-mentioned second port set, and the corresponding frequency domain bandwidth needs to include the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set.
  • the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS needs to include the above-mentioned first port set, and the corresponding frequency domain bandwidth needs to include the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set.
  • the method also includes: receiving first indication information; or, sending the first indication information; the first indication information is used to indicate any one or more of the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount.
  • transmitting and receiving a signal helps to accurately receive/send the signal.
  • a signal such as a downlink reference signal, an estimated channel, or an SRS
  • Calculating a phase difference feedback amount according to the first indication information helps to accurately calculate the phase difference feedback amount.
  • the first indication information may also indicate any one or more of the items with an associated relationship, as well as some items that have not established an associated relationship with other items.
  • the recipient of the first indication information may learn the remaining unindicated items based on the associated relationship, so as to reduce the amount of information in the first indication information and reduce the overhead of sending the first indication information.
  • the method further includes: determining the first port set based on SRS port information; the SRS port information is information of the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment.
  • the first port set corresponding to each phase difference feedback amount is determined, which can simplify the interaction process between the SRS receiver and sender regarding the first port set.
  • the method further includes: determining the second port set based on downlink reference signal port information; the downlink reference signal port information is information of the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment; determining the first frequency domain position set based on the second frequency domain position set and the third frequency domain position set; the second frequency domain position set is one or more frequency domain positions corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment, and the third frequency domain position set is one or more frequency domain positions corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the second moment; or, determining the first frequency domain basis set based on the second frequency domain basis set and the third frequency domain basis set; the second frequency domain basis set is one or more frequency domain basis corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment, and the third frequency domain basis set is one or more frequency domain basis corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the second moment.
  • the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to each phase difference feedback amount is determined, and the interaction process between the receiver and the sender of the downlink reference signal regarding the second port set, the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set can be simplified.
  • any two antenna ports in the first port set have coherence capability
  • any two downlink reference signal ports in the second port set have coherence capability
  • the at least one first port set may be divided based on the coherence capability between the antenna ports of the terminal device, wherein any two antenna ports in each first port set are coherent, that is, when any two antenna ports in each first port set send/receive signals at the same time, the transmit/receive links corresponding to the any two antenna ports have the same influence on the amplitude and phase of the signal.
  • any two downlink reference signal ports in the second port set are coherent, wherein each downlink reference signal port may correspond to at least one antenna port.
  • any two downlink reference signal ports in the second port set if at least one antenna port corresponding to one of the downlink reference signal ports is coherent with at least one antenna port corresponding to the other downlink reference signal port, it can be indicated that the above-mentioned any two downlink reference signal ports have coherence capability.
  • the port set is divided based on the coherence capability so as to realize sharing of the same phase difference feedback amount for multiple antenna ports, thereby saving the overhead of calculating and feeding back the phase difference feedback amount.
  • the downlink reference signal includes any one of a channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS), a tracking reference signal (TRS), a phase tracking reference signal (PT-RS) and a demodulation reference signal (DM-RS).
  • CSI-RS channel state information-reference signal
  • TRS tracking reference signal
  • PT-RS phase tracking reference signal
  • DM-RS demodulation reference signal
  • an embodiment of the present application discloses a communication method, the method comprising: sending a downlink reference signal at a first moment and a second moment respectively based on at least one second port set; the second port set includes one or more downlink reference signal ports; receiving feedback information, the feedback information being used to indicate multiple phase difference feedback amounts; each of the phase difference feedback amounts being used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port in the corresponding first port set at the first moment and the second moment; the first port set includes one or more antenna ports; each of the phase difference feedback amounts corresponds to one of the at least one first port set.
  • each of the phase difference feedback amounts is used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the corresponding antenna port in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment, including at least one of the following: the phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the corresponding antenna port in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment; the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals is the cross-correlation phase information of the downlink reference signals received by the antenna port in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment; the phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the channels of the corresponding antenna port in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment; The phase difference information between the channels is the phase information of the mutual correlation between the channel at the first moment and the channel at the second moment; the channel at the first moment is determined based on the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port in the first port set at the first moment, and the channel at the second moment is determined based on
  • the method further includes: receiving SRS at a third moment and a fourth moment; the time interval between the first moment and the third moment is a first time difference, and the time interval between the second moment and the fourth moment is a second time difference; the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to one third moment and one fourth moment.
  • the first time difference is less than a first threshold, and the second time difference is less than the first threshold; or, the first time difference is less than or equal to the first threshold, and the second time difference is less than or equal to the first threshold.
  • the first threshold satisfies any one of the following: the first threshold is equal to one quarter of the third time difference, and the third time difference is the time interval between the third moment and the fourth moment; the first threshold is equal to one fifth of the third time difference; the first threshold is equal to one eighth of the third time difference; the first threshold is equal to 5 time slots; the first threshold is equal to 2 time slots; the first threshold is equal to 1 time slot.
  • the phase difference feedback amount is used to compensate for a difference between a random phase corresponding to the SRS received at the third moment and a random phase corresponding to the SRS received at the fourth moment.
  • the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to a second port set in the at least one second port set; the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to a first frequency domain position set or corresponds to a first frequency domain basis set; the first frequency domain position set includes one or more frequency domain positions, and the first frequency domain basis set includes one or more frequency domain bases.
  • any two of the multiple phase difference feedback amounts satisfy at least one of the following: the first port sets corresponding to the any two phase difference feedback amounts are different; the second port sets corresponding to the any two phase difference feedback amounts are different; the first frequency domain position sets or first frequency domain basis sets corresponding to the any two phase difference feedback amounts are different.
  • the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment includes the second port set, and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment includes the second port set;
  • the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set, and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set;
  • the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the third moment includes the first port set, and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment includes the first port set;
  • the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the third moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set, and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set
  • the method includes: sending first indication information, or receiving the first indication information; the first indication information is used to indicate any one or more of the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount.
  • the first port set is determined based on SRS port information
  • the SRS port information is information of a transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and a transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment.
  • the second port set is determined based on the downlink reference signal port information
  • the downlink reference signal port information is information of the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment
  • the first frequency domain position set is determined based on the second frequency domain position set and the third frequency domain position set
  • the second frequency domain position set is one or more frequency domain positions corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment
  • the third frequency domain position set is one or more frequency domain positions corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the second moment
  • the first frequency domain basis set is determined based on the second frequency domain basis set and the third frequency domain basis set
  • the second frequency domain basis set is one or more frequency domain basis corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment
  • the third frequency domain basis set is one or more frequency domain basis corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the second moment.
  • any two antenna ports in the first port set have coherence capability
  • any two downlink reference signal ports in the second port set have coherence capability
  • the downlink reference signal includes any one of CSI-RS, TRS, PT-RS and DM-RS.
  • the present application discloses a communication device, comprising a unit for executing the method as described in the first aspect or any optional implementation of the first aspect; or, a unit for executing the method as described in the second aspect or any optional implementation of the second aspect.
  • the present application discloses a communication device, comprising a memory and a processor; the memory is used to store programs; the processor is used to execute the programs stored in the processor, and when the program is executed by the processor, the processor executes the method described in the first aspect or any optional implementation of the first aspect; or, the processor executes the method described in the second aspect or any optional implementation of the second aspect.
  • the present application discloses a communication device, comprising a logic circuit and an interface, wherein the logic circuit is coupled to the interface; the interface is used to input and/or output code instructions, and the logic circuit is used to execute the code instructions.
  • the logic circuit executes the method described in the first aspect or any optional embodiment of the first aspect; or, the logic circuit executes the method described in the second aspect or any optional embodiment of the second aspect.
  • the present application discloses a computer storage medium, wherein a computer program is stored in the computer storage medium, and the computer program includes program instructions.
  • the program instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes the method described in the first aspect or any optional embodiment of the first aspect; or, the processor executes the method described in the second aspect or any optional embodiment of the second aspect.
  • the present application discloses a computer program product, which includes a computer program or a computer code.
  • the computer program or the computer code runs on a computer, the method described in the first aspect or any optional embodiment of the first aspect is executed; or, the method described in the second aspect or any optional embodiment of the second aspect is executed.
  • the present application discloses a communication system, comprising a terminal device and a network device, wherein the terminal device is used to execute the method described in the first aspect or any optional embodiment of the first aspect, and the network device is used to execute the method described in the second aspect or any optional embodiment of the second aspect.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a channel prediction method based on SRS channel estimation results provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a channel prediction method based on CSI feedback results provided in an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG4 is an interactive schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG5 is an interactive schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG6 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG7a is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG7b is an interactive schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG8 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG9a is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG9b is an interactive schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG10 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG11 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • At least one (item) means one or more, “more than one” means two or more, and “at least two (items)” means two or three and more than three.
  • “And/or” is used to describe the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist. For example, “A and/or B” can mean: only A exists, only B exists, and A and B exist at the same time, where A and B can be singular or plural. The character “/” generally indicates that the objects associated before and after are in an “or” relationship. "At least one of the following items” or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single items or plural items.
  • At least one of a, b or c can mean: a, b, c, "a and b", “a and c", “b and c", or "a and b and c", where a, b, c can be single or multiple.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication method provided by the present application can be applied to a mobile communication system, and the mobile communication system includes a network device 101 and a terminal device 102.
  • the terminal device 102 can calculate and feed back a phase difference feedback amount to the network device 101 based on the received downlink reference signal, so that the network device 101 compensates for the difference in the random phase of the SRS generated when the terminal device 102 sends the SRS.
  • the above mobile communication system may be a 5G mobile communication system, or a new communication system in future communication development, such as a sixth-generation (6G) mobile communication system.
  • the above method may also be applied to mobile wireless communication scenarios.
  • the above mobile communication system may be a cellular mobile wireless communication system, or a wireless local area network (WLAN) system, such as mobile wireless fidelity (WI-FI). It is understandable that the above communication system may be applied to low-frequency scenarios (sub 6G) or high-frequency scenarios (above 6G).
  • the network device 101 shown in FIG. 1 may be an access network device.
  • the access network device refers to a device that provides network access functions, such as a radio access network (RAN) base station.
  • the network device 101 may be an evolved node B (eNB), the next generation Node B (gNB), a home node B (HNB), or a base station in a future mobile communication system.
  • the network device 101 may include a base station (BS), or a base station and a wireless resource management device for controlling the base station.
  • the terminal device 102 shown in FIG. 1 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer (pad), a virtual reality (VR) terminal, an augmented reality (AR) terminal, a wireless terminal in the field of unmanned driving, a wireless terminal in the field of telemedicine, etc.
  • VR virtual reality
  • AR augmented reality
  • the channel prediction methods mainly include two types: a channel prediction method based on SRS channel estimation results and a channel prediction method based on CSI feedback results.
  • the above two types of methods will be introduced respectively below.
  • the channel prediction method based on SRS channel estimation results can be applied to TDD mMIMO mobile communication systems.
  • the network equipment can estimate the uplink CSI based on the SRS sent by the terminal device, and then predict the downlink channel at a specific time in the future based on channel reciprocity (the uplink channel is the same as the downlink channel at the same time) and the uplink CSI estimated at multiple times.
  • Figure 2 is a scenario diagram of a channel prediction method based on the SRS channel estimation result provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the above method may include the following steps:
  • the network device sends SRS indication information, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the SRS indication information.
  • the SRS indication information is used to indicate the SRS resources configured on the terminal device side, and the terminal device can configure the SRS resources according to the SRS resource indication information.
  • the network device receives the SRS at different times.
  • the terminal device sends the SRS at different times based on the received SRS indication information.
  • the terminal device after configuring the SRS resource according to the SRS resource indication information, the terminal device sends the SRS to the network device at different times t1 , t2 to tM (M ⁇ 2). Correspondingly, the network device receives the SRS at different times.
  • the network device performs channel estimation on the uplink channel based on the SRS received at different times, and obtains a CSI estimation result corresponding to each time.
  • the network device can use a specific channel estimation algorithm to perform channel estimation on the SRS channels (uplink channels) corresponding to different times t 1 , t 2 to t M based on the SRS received at different times, and can obtain the uplink CSI estimation results corresponding to each time.
  • S204 The terminal device predicts the downlink channel at a specific time in the future based on the CSI estimation results corresponding to different time periods.
  • Network equipment can be based on Calculate the law of channel changes over time and predict based on a specific channel prediction algorithm CSI at the future downlink transmission time. Furthermore, the network device may also perform downlink weight calculation and downlink data transmission based on the predicted CSI at the future downlink transmission time.
  • the above-mentioned channel prediction algorithm based on the SRS channel estimation result can also be combined with the time domain correlation of the channel fed back by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can estimate the CSI of the downlink channel at each moment based on the downlink reference signal (such as TRS) received at different moments, further calculate the correlation between the downlink channels at different moments (including amplitude information and phase information), and feed it back to the network device.
  • the network device calculates the algorithm parameters of the channel prediction based on the correlation information fed back by the terminal device to improve the performance of the above-mentioned channel prediction algorithm.
  • this method still cannot eliminate the influence of the random phase of SRS on channel prediction.
  • the channel prediction method based on CSI feedback results can be applied to TDD mMIMO mobile communication systems.
  • the terminal device can estimate the downlink CSI based on the received downlink reference signal (such as CSI-RS), and then perform CSI quantization compression feedback according to the protocol specifications, and feed back the downlink CSI to the network device.
  • the network device can predict the downlink channel at a specific time in the future based on the downlink CSI fed back by the terminal device.
  • Figure 3 is a scenario diagram of a channel prediction method based on CSI feedback results provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the above method includes the following steps:
  • the network device sends CSI-RS resource indication information.
  • the terminal device receives the CSI-RS resource indication information.
  • the CSI-RS resource indication information may be used to indicate the CSI-RS resources configured on the terminal device side, and the terminal device may perform CSI-RS resource configuration according to the CSI-RS resource indication information.
  • the network device sends CSI-RS at different times, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the CSI-RS at different times.
  • the network device sends CSI-RS at different times, and then the terminal device receives the CSI-RS sent by the network device at t 1 , t 2 to t M (M ⁇ 2) respectively according to the instruction of the network device.
  • the terminal device performs channel estimation on the downlink channel based on the CSI-RS received at different times, and obtains the downlink CSI estimation result corresponding to each time.
  • the network device can use a specific channel estimation algorithm to perform channel estimation on the CSI-RS channels (downlink channels) corresponding to t 1 , t 2 to t M based on the CSI-RS received at different times, and can obtain the downlink CSI estimation results corresponding to each time.
  • CSI-RS channels downlink channels
  • the terminal device feeds back the downlink CSI estimation results corresponding to different time periods to the network device.
  • the network device can predict the downlink channel at a specific time period in the future based on the downlink CSI estimation results at different time periods.
  • the terminal device After obtaining the downlink CSI estimation result at each moment, the terminal device can quantize and compress the CSI according to the specification of the communication protocol to feed back the downlink CSI estimation result to the network device. Then the network device can use the CSI feedback results at different moments (the downlink CSI estimation result fed back by the terminal device) to ), calculate the law of channel changes over time, and predict the downlink channel at a specific time in the future based on a specific channel prediction algorithm. Furthermore, the network device can also perform downlink weight calculation and downlink data transmission based on the prediction result of the downlink channel at a specific time.
  • channel prediction based on CSI feedback results relies on the terminal device to measure and feedback complete CSI (downlink CSI estimation results).
  • the CSI-RS overhead and CSI feedback overhead are large, which affects the downlink and uplink transmission rates.
  • compressed feedback of CSI will cause quantization loss, making the feedback CSI less accurate, thereby affecting the accuracy of channel prediction.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and related products, which can feedback the information of the random phase difference corresponding to the uplink channel to improve the accuracy of channel prediction.
  • the above communication method may include the following steps:
  • a first communication device receives a downlink reference signal at a first time and a second time based on at least one first port set,
  • the first port set includes one or more antenna ports.
  • the antenna port may be an entity physical antenna port or a virtual logical antenna port.
  • the downlink reference signal includes but is not limited to any one of CSI-RS, TRS, PT-RS and DM-RS.
  • the terminal device may divide each antenna port into at least one first port set based on the coherence capability between each antenna port. Any two antenna ports in each first port set are coherent, that is, when any two antenna ports in each first port set send/receive signals at the same time, the transmit/receive links corresponding to the any two antenna ports have the same influence on the amplitude and phase of the signal.
  • the first communication device sends feedback information, where the feedback information is used to indicate a plurality of phase difference feedback amounts.
  • Each of the phase difference feedback amounts corresponds to one of the at least one first port set; the phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the corresponding antenna port in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment.
  • the multiple phase difference feedback amounts indicated by the feedback information may correspond to the first port set. If the terminal device includes two or more first port sets, each phase difference feedback amount corresponds to one of the two or more first port sets.
  • each phase difference feedback amount corresponds to one of the two or more first port sets.
  • the antenna ports in the first port set support receiving downlink reference signals of different frequency bands at the same time, the antenna ports in the first port set can receive multiple different downlink reference signals at the same time.
  • the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first time and the second time may be different.
  • phase difference information between the downlink reference signals in multiple frequency bands at different times may be indicated by multiple phase difference feedback amounts, that is, among the multiple phase difference feedback amounts indicated by the feedback information, two or more phase difference feedback amounts may correspond to the same first port set. It should be understood that the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals indicated by the multiple phase difference feedback amounts may be different.
  • the first port set may also correspond to one phase difference feedback amount, and correspondingly, the above feedback information may be used to indicate the phase difference feedback amount.
  • the first port set includes one antenna port, or includes multiple antenna ports with coherence capability. If the channel corresponding to each antenna port in the first port set has the same or similar time-varying law, then the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals corresponding to each antenna port at different times (such as the first time and the second time) is also the same or similar. Therefore, the feedback information sent by the first communication device may include only one phase difference feedback amount to indicate the above-mentioned same or similar phase difference information.
  • the antenna ports in each first antenna port set share the same phase difference feedback amount, saving the overhead of calculating and feeding back the phase difference feedback amount.
  • phase information not only includes the random phase information generated by the hardware of the transmitter (such as the antenna port of the above-mentioned terminal device), but also includes the phase change caused by the change of the channel itself over time.
  • the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals indicated by the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount can reflect the change of the downlink channel itself corresponding to the antenna port in the first port set between the first moment and the second moment.
  • the change of the downlink channel itself between the third moment and the fourth moment can be equivalent to the change of the uplink channel itself between the first moment and the second moment.
  • the network device it is helpful for the network device to exclude the phase change caused by the change of the uplink channel itself over time in the uplink channel estimation result based on the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount, and then the above-mentioned random phase information can be determined, which helps to improve the accuracy of channel prediction.
  • the present application feeds back phase difference information corresponding to downlink reference signals at different times, and the feedback overhead is lower.
  • each phase difference feedback amount may also correspond to a second port set, the second port set including one or more downlink reference signal ports, the downlink reference signal port being used to send a downlink reference signal.
  • the downlink reference signal port may be an entity physical antenna port or a virtual logical antenna port.
  • each phase difference feedback amount may also correspond to a first frequency domain position set or a first frequency domain basis set, wherein the first frequency domain position set includes one or more frequency domain positions, and the first frequency domain basis set includes one or more frequency domain basis.
  • the frequency domain position set may be a set consisting of a set of frequency domain subcarrier indices, each frequency domain subcarrier index corresponds to a frequency domain position, and the first communication device may obtain a downlink reference signal or an estimated channel on the corresponding frequency domain subcarrier through the frequency domain subcarrier index to calculate the phase difference feedback amount.
  • the first communication device extracts the downlink reference signal or the estimated channel corresponding to the specified frequency domain index in the frequency domain for calculating the phase difference feedback amount.
  • the frequency domain basis refers to the multiplication of the reference signal vector or channel vector of the above frequency domain positions within a frequency domain bandwidth.
  • a specific transformation matrix a reference signal vector in a transform domain or a channel vector in a transform domain is obtained.
  • Each column of the transform matrix is called a frequency domain basis.
  • the transform matrix can be a DFT matrix.
  • the frequency domain basis set can include one or more columns of the transform matrix.
  • the reference signal vector or channel vector at the frequency domain position can be multiplied with one or more columns of the selected transform matrix to obtain the reference signal vector in the transform domain or the channel vector in the transform domain, and then the correlation calculation is performed based on the reference signal vector in the transform domain or the channel vector in the transform domain.
  • the second port set corresponding to each phase difference feedback amount may be different, and the corresponding first frequency domain position set or first frequency domain basis set may also be different.
  • the downlink reference signal port sets corresponding to the downlink reference signal at different times need to include the above-mentioned second port set, and the corresponding frequency domain bandwidth needs to include the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set.
  • the first communication device can determine the second port set based on the downlink reference signal port information included in the indication information corresponding to the downlink reference signal resources, so that the downlink reference signal port corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment includes the above-mentioned second port set, and the downlink reference signal port corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment includes the above-mentioned second port set.
  • the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set is determined, so that the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment includes the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set, and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment includes the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set.
  • the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set refers to the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set before the transformation, and accordingly, the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment or the second moment includes multiple frequency domain positions before the transformation.
  • the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at different times needs to include the above-mentioned first port set, and the corresponding frequency domain bandwidth needs to include the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set.
  • the first communication device can determine the first port set based on the SRS port information contained in the indication information corresponding to the SRS resource, so that the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the third moment includes the first port set, and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment includes the first port set.
  • the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set is determined, so that the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the third moment includes the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the frequency domain position set or the frequency domain basis set, and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment includes the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the frequency domain position set or the frequency domain basis set.
  • the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the third moment or the fourth moment includes multiple frequency domain positions before the transformation.
  • the first communication device can also determine the first frequency domain position set/first frequency domain basis set based on the second frequency domain position set/second frequency domain basis set and the third frequency domain position set/third frequency domain basis set.
  • a phase difference feedback amount can be uniquely determined. Accordingly, if any one or more of the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set/first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the two phase difference feedback amounts are different, the two phase difference feedback amounts are different.
  • the multiple phase difference feedback amounts indicated by the above feedback information can be different (that is, for the same channel, only one phase difference feedback amount is fed back) to reduce the additional overhead caused by repeated feedback.
  • the above communication method may further include:
  • the first communication device sends an SRS at a third moment and a fourth moment based on the at least one first port set.
  • the time interval between the first moment and the third moment is a first time difference
  • the time interval between the second moment and the fourth moment is a second time difference
  • the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to one third moment and one fourth moment.
  • the time interval between the sending moment of the downlink reference signal and the sending moment of the SRS should be as small as possible, that is, the first time difference and the second time difference should be as small as possible. Therefore, this embodiment constrains the first time difference and the second time difference by setting a time upper limit (first threshold), which can avoid the problem of low accuracy of the phase difference feedback amount caused by the above-mentioned long time interval.
  • the above-mentioned first time difference is less than the first threshold, and the above-mentioned second time difference is less than the above-mentioned first threshold; or, the above-mentioned first time difference is less than or equal to the above-mentioned first threshold, and the above-mentioned second time difference is less than or equal to the above-mentioned first threshold.
  • the first threshold may satisfy any one of the following: the first threshold is equal to one quarter of the third time difference, where the third time difference is the time interval between the third moment and the fourth moment; the first threshold is equal to one fifth of the third time difference; the first threshold is equal to one eighth of the third time difference; the first threshold is equal to the time of 5 time slots; the first threshold is equal to 2 The time of a time slot; the above-mentioned first threshold is equal to the time of 1 time slot.
  • the time slot can be determined based on the subcarrier spacing. For example, under the specification of the 5G NR protocol, if the subcarrier spacing is 15 kilohertz (KHz), the corresponding time slot can be 1 millisecond, and if the subcarrier spacing is 30KHz, the corresponding time slot can be 0.5 milliseconds.
  • KHz 15 kilohertz
  • the first time difference and the second time difference may be constrained based on the channel coherence time, so that the time interval between the sending time of each downlink reference signal and the sending time of its corresponding SRS is as short as possible to the channel coherence time, so that the channel does not change much between the two times, and further, the phase difference measured by the downlink reference signal (such as the phase difference indicated by the above phase difference feedback amount) can be used to represent the phase difference of the uplink channel.
  • c is the speed of light
  • f is the carrier frequency of the communication system
  • v is the moving speed of the terminal device.
  • the lower time limit of the first time difference and the second time difference can be determined based on the constraints of the communication protocol frame structure, and/or based on the constraints of the downlink reference signal processing timing (such as the timing constraints of determining the phase difference feedback amount based on the downlink reference signal, and/or the timing constraints of determining the corresponding channel based on the downlink reference signal).
  • the terminal device requires 1 millisecond to complete the downlink reference signal processing, and the terminal device simultaneously sends the SRS and the phase difference feedback amount at the fourth moment, then the lower time limit of the second time difference is 1 millisecond, otherwise the terminal device cannot complete the calculation of the phase difference feedback amount before the fourth moment.
  • the method may further include:
  • the first communication device receives the first indication information. Alternatively, the first communication device sends the first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate any one or more of the first port set, the second port set, the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount.
  • receiving and transmitting a signal helps to achieve more accurate reception/transmission of the signal.
  • a signal such as a downlink reference signal, an estimated channel, or an SRS
  • Calculating the phase difference feedback amount according to the first indication information helps to achieve accurate calculation of the phase difference feedback amount.
  • the first indication information may also indicate any one or more of the items among which an association is established, as well as some items that are not associated with other items.
  • the recipient of the first indication information may obtain the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain base set corresponding to the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount based on the indication of the first indication information and the association.
  • indicating the above-mentioned correspondences based on the associations can reduce the amount of information in the first indication information and reduce the overhead of sending the first indication information.
  • the first indication information can indicate any one of the first port set and the second port set, and the party receiving the first indication information can obtain the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain base set corresponding to the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount based on the indication of the first indication information and the association relationship. It can be understood that at this time, the first indication information can also indicate the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain base set corresponding to the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount.
  • the first indication information can indicate the first port set and any one of the frequency domain position set or the frequency domain base set, and the party receiving the first indication information can obtain the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain base set corresponding to the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount based on the association relationship. It can be understood that at this time, the first indication information can also indicate the second port set corresponding to the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount.
  • the first indication information can indicate any one of the second port set and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain base set, and the party receiving the first indication information can obtain the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain base set corresponding to the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount based on the association relationship. It can be understood that at this time, the first indication information can also indicate the first port set corresponding to the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount.
  • the first indication information may indicate any one of the first port set, the second port set, and the frequency domain position set or the frequency domain base set. It should be noted that, when the terminal device or network device is configured with any of the above association relationships, the first indication information may still indicate any one or more of the association relationships involved, which is not limited here.
  • the first communication device may also indicate the first corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount in an implicit indication manner.
  • the original downlink reference signal such as CSI-RS
  • SRS indication information in the relevant communication protocol standard is used to indicate the SRS port information, frequency domain position information or frequency domain basis information (corresponding to the second frequency domain position set or the second frequency domain basis set) corresponding to the SRS configured by the network device for the terminal device, and the downlink reference signal port information, frequency domain position information or frequency domain basis information (corresponding to the third frequency domain position set or the third frequency domain basis set) corresponding to the downlink reference signal configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the above method also includes the following steps:
  • the first communication device determines a first port set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount based on the SRS port information.
  • the first communication device determines a second port set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount based on the downlink reference signal port information.
  • the first communication device determines the first frequency domain position set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount based on the second frequency domain position set and the third frequency domain position set, or the first communication device determines the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount based on the second frequency domain basis set and the third frequency domain basis set.
  • the first communication device may determine the second frequency domain position set or the second frequency domain basis set based on the frequency domain position information or the frequency domain basis information corresponding to the SRS, and may determine the third frequency domain position set or the third frequency domain basis set based on the frequency domain position information or the frequency domain basis information corresponding to the downlink reference signal. Then, the first communication device may determine the first frequency domain position set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount based on the second frequency domain position set and the third frequency domain position set, and may determine the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount based on the second frequency domain basis set and the third frequency domain basis set.
  • the first frequency domain position set may be the intersection of the second frequency domain position set and the third frequency domain position set
  • the first frequency domain basis set may be the intersection of the second frequency domain basis set and the third frequency domain basis set.
  • the feedback information sent by the first communication device may include the above-mentioned implicit indication content.
  • the second communication device may obtain the port information, frequency domain position or frequency domain base information corresponding to each phase difference feedback amount based on the content.
  • the above-mentioned implicit indication method can simplify the interaction process between the receiver and sender of the SRS/downlink reference signal regarding the first port set, the second port set, the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set.
  • the above communication method may include the following steps:
  • a second communication device sends a downlink reference signal at a first time and a second time respectively based on at least one second port set, where the second port set includes one or more downlink reference signal ports.
  • a downlink reference signal port is used to send a downlink reference signal, which may be a physical antenna port or a virtual logical antenna port.
  • the downlink reference signal includes but is not limited to any one of CSI-RS, TRS, PT-RS and DM-RS.
  • the network device may divide each downlink reference signal port into at least one second port set based on whether each downlink reference signal port is coherent, wherein any two downlink reference signal ports in each second port set are coherent, that is, when any two downlink reference signal ports in each second port set send/receive signals at the same time, the transmission/reception links corresponding to the any two downlink reference signal ports have the same influence on the amplitude and phase of the signal.
  • the second communication device receives feedback information, where the feedback information is used to indicate a plurality of phase difference feedback amounts.
  • the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the above-mentioned first moment and the above-mentioned second moment; the above-mentioned first port set includes one or more antenna ports of the terminal device; the above-mentioned first port set corresponds to at least one phase difference feedback amount among the above-mentioned multiple phase difference feedback amounts.
  • any one of the above-mentioned multiple phase difference feedback amounts corresponds to a second port set.
  • the phase difference feedback amount can uniquely correspond to a second port set.
  • its phase information not only includes the random phase information generated by the hardware of the transmitter (such as the antenna port of the above-mentioned terminal device), but also includes the phase change caused by the change of the channel itself over time.
  • the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals indicated by the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount can reflect the changes in the downlink channel itself corresponding to the antenna port in the first port set between the first moment and the second moment.
  • the network device can exclude the uplink channel estimation.
  • the phase change in the result caused by the uplink channel itself changing over time can then determine the above-mentioned random phase information, which helps to improve the accuracy of channel prediction of network devices.
  • the network device may also compensate for the difference in the random phase of the SRS contained in the uplink channel.
  • the above method may also include the following steps:
  • the second communication device receives the SRS at the third time and the fourth time.
  • the second communication device needs to determine the SRS consistent with the beam direction of the sent downlink reference signal based on all received SRSs.
  • the determination method is to calculate the projection of all received SRSs in the downlink reference signal beam direction.
  • the above method may further include:
  • the second communication device sends the first indication information. Alternatively, the second communication device receives the first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate any one or more of the first port set, the second port set, the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount.
  • the implementation of S504 may refer to the relevant introduction of the aforementioned embodiment S404, which will not be described here.
  • the second communication device performs channel estimation on the uplink channel based on the received SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment to obtain an uplink channel estimation result.
  • the uplink channel can be determined based on the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set.
  • the feedback information received by the second communication device may include the first port set corresponding to each phase difference feedback amount, and the information of the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to each phase difference feedback amount.
  • the second communication device can determine the corresponding uplink channel based on this, and perform channel estimation on the uplink channel to obtain the uplink channel estimation result.
  • the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to each phase difference feedback amount can be indicated by explicit indication or implicit indication.
  • the specific implementation method and related instructions can refer to the relevant introduction of S404, which will not be repeated here.
  • the second communication device compensates for the difference in SRS random phase corresponding to the second port set based on the multiple phase difference feedback amounts indicated by the feedback information and the uplink channel estimation result.
  • each phase difference feedback amount corresponds to the same uplink channel, and accordingly, each phase difference feedback amount can correspond to the uplink channel estimation result of the same uplink channel.
  • the second communication device can also calculate the phase difference information of the uplink channel based on the uplink channel estimation results at the third moment and the fourth moment, and then compensate the above-mentioned SRS random phase difference based on the phase difference information of the uplink channel and the corresponding phase difference feedback amount.
  • the difference in random phases corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment can be determined and compensated.
  • the phase difference information of the uplink channel includes the phase change caused by the change of the channel itself over time and the phase change caused by the random phase of the SRS.
  • the phase change caused by the change of the downlink channel itself over time indicated by the above phase difference feedback amount can be equivalent to the phase change caused by the change of the uplink channel itself over time. Therefore, when the phase difference information of the uplink channel and the above phase difference feedback amount are obtained, the second communication device can obtain the information of the random phase of the SRS and can compensate for the difference in the random phase of the SRS at different moments. Furthermore, the second communication device performs channel prediction based on the compensated channel estimation result, which can improve the performance of channel prediction.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a method, such as the method may include the above-mentioned S401 and S402, and S501 and S502; for example, the method may include S401, S402, S403, and S501, S502, S503; for example, the method may include S401, S402, S403, S404, and S501, S502, S503, S504; for example, the method may include S401, S402, S403, S405, S406, S407, and S501, S502, S503.
  • the calculation formula corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount may be pre-specified in the standard, or may be indicated by the second communication device to the first communication device.
  • Figure 6 is a scene diagram of a communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the downlink (including the transmission link of the second communication device and the reception link of the first communication device) can maintain the consistency of amplitude and phase at different times.
  • FIG6 for a phase difference feedback amount, its calculation process can be described as follows:
  • the second communication device sends resource indication information to the first communication device.
  • the first communication device receives the resource indication information.
  • the resource indication information can be used to indicate the resource position of the downlink reference signal at two moments (the first moment and the second moment) and the resource position of the SRS at two corresponding moments (the third moment and the fourth moment), so that each downlink reference signal moment is close to the corresponding SRS moment.
  • the above-mentioned downlink reference signal may include any one of CSI-RS, TRS, PT-RS and DM-RS. It can be understood that the above-mentioned downlink reference signal moment may refer to the moment of sending/receiving the downlink reference signal, and the above-mentioned SRS moment may refer to the moment of sending/receiving the SRS.
  • S403 For the relevant description of the downlink reference signal moment and the SRS moment, refer to the relevant introduction of S403, which will not be repeated here.
  • the second communication device sends a downlink reference signal at the downlink reference signal resource location indicated by the resource indication information.
  • the first communication device receives the downlink reference signal.
  • the second communication device may send a downlink reference signal at the first time and the second time respectively.
  • the first communication device receives the downlink reference signal.
  • the first communication device performs downlink channel estimation based on the received downlink reference signal, and calculates a phase difference feedback amount based on downlink channel estimation results at different times.
  • the results of downlink channel estimation at the first moment and the second moment are respectively Since the same downlink can maintain the consistency of amplitude and phase at different times, The following relationship can be satisfied:
  • the phase difference feedback amount ⁇ can be calculated, and ⁇ can satisfy the following relationship:
  • the first communication device sends an SRS at the SRS resource location indicated by the resource indication information.
  • the second communication device receives the SRS.
  • the first communication device may send a downlink reference signal at the third time and the fourth time respectively, and correspondingly, the second communication device receives the downlink reference signal.
  • execution order of S604 may be before or after S603, which is not limited here.
  • the execution order of S604 and S603 may be determined based on the capability of the first communication device to calculate the phase difference feedback amount, so as to flexibly adapt to first communication devices with different computing capabilities.
  • the second communication device performs uplink channel estimation based on the received SRS, and calculates phase difference information corresponding to the uplink channel based on uplink channel estimation results at different times.
  • the results of uplink channel estimation at the first time and the second time are respectively Affected by the random phase of SRS, The following relationship can be satisfied:
  • each downlink reference signal is close to the corresponding SRS time, it can be considered that the channel does not change substantially between the downlink reference signal sending time and the SRS sending time, and the uplink and downlink channels satisfy reciprocity, that is,
  • the second communication device is based on The phase difference information ⁇ ′ of the uplink channel at the third moment and the fourth moment can be calculated, and ⁇ ′ can satisfy the following relationship:
  • ⁇ ′ can satisfy the following relationship:
  • the first communication device sends a phase difference feedback value, and correspondingly, the second communication device receives the phase difference feedback value.
  • the execution order of S605 may be before or after the first communication device sends the SRS at the fourth moment, and the first communication device may also synchronously send or carry the phase difference feedback amount when sending the SRS at the fourth moment, which is not limited here.
  • Other descriptions of S606 may refer to the relevant introduction of S402 in the aforementioned embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the second communication device determines and compensates for the SRS random phase difference based on the phase difference feedback amount and the phase difference information of the uplink channel.
  • phase difference information between the third moment and the fourth moment has eliminated the difference in the SRS random phase corresponding to the third moment, that is, after the phase difference compensation and
  • the random phase in is the same random phase It can be understood as, and There is phase consistency between them, so the law of channel changes over time is no longer subject to the same random phase
  • the second communication device is based on and By analyzing the law of channel changes and performing channel prediction, the influence of random phase differences has been eliminated, which can improve the performance of channel prediction.
  • the channel estimated based on the downlink reference signal and SRS in the present application may correspond to the full channel matrix of all transmit and receive ports and all frequency domains/frequency domain bases at different times, or may correspond to the partial channel elements of the channel matrix at some transmit and receive ports and all or part of the frequency domain/frequency domain bases (it can be understood that a channel element may correspond to the value at a position in the channel), or may correspond to the partial channel elements of the channel matrix at some or all transmit and receive ports and part of the frequency domain/frequency domain bases. No limitation is made here.
  • the above-mentioned transmit and receive port includes an antenna port for receiving and sending the downlink reference signal
  • the above-mentioned transmit and receive port includes an antenna port for sending and receiving the SRS.
  • the above-mentioned transmit and receive port may include at least one first port set and at least one second port set
  • the above-mentioned frequency domain/frequency domain base may include a first frequency domain position set/a first frequency domain base set.
  • phase difference feedback amount The calculation formula of the phase difference feedback amount will be described below based on FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 6 and related embodiments.
  • the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the downlink reference signals received at the second moment can be directly represented by the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment, so as to shorten the calculation process of the phase difference feedback amount and reduce the calculation overhead.
  • the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals is the phase information of the cross-correlation of the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment
  • the cross-correlation can be used to indicate the similarity between the downlink reference signals at the first moment and the second moment
  • the cross-correlation phase information of the downlink reference signals is the phase difference between the downlink reference signals at the first moment and the second moment calculated based on the cross-correlation algorithm.
  • the phase difference feedback amount ⁇ can satisfy the following relationship:
  • is the phase difference between the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports of the first port set at the first moment and the second moment.
  • the complex argument (arg) function is used to calculate the phase of the complex number.
  • y 1 ,y 2 are column vectors consisting of the downlink reference signals corresponding to the first port set, the second port set, the first frequency domain position set/the first frequency domain basis set specified at the first moment and the second moment, respectively. is the row vector obtained by conjugate transpose of y 1 , Yes and the phase of the inner product of y 2.
  • the first communication device can feedback The phase of the inner product of y and y 2 .
  • the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports of the first port set at the first moment and the second moment may be projected onto the same base B, and then the phase change ⁇ of the cross-correlation of the downlink reference signal projections is calculated.
  • the projection results corresponding to the downlink reference signals y1 and y2 received at the first moment and the second moment are and The following relationship can be satisfied:
  • the basis B satisfies B H B is the unit matrix, and B H is the row vector obtained by the conjugate transpose of B. Accordingly, the phase change ⁇ of the cross-correlation of the downlink reference signal projection can satisfy the following relationship:
  • the arg function is used to take the phase of the complex number, yes The conjugate transposed matrix of Indicates taking and The phase of the inner product. Accordingly, the first communication device feedbacks and The phase of the inner product.
  • the phase of the conjugate multiplication of specific elements (scalars) in the downlink reference signal can also be calculated. Equivalent to the selected second port set only including a downlink reference signal port with index i, the selected first port set only including an antenna port with index j, the selected frequency position set only including the frequency position corresponding to the frequency domain subcarrier with index k, and the corresponding downlink reference signals received at the first moment and the second moment are respectively Assuming that the phase difference feedback amount corresponding to the specific channel element is ⁇ i,j,k , ⁇ i,j,k can satisfy the following relationship:
  • the first communication device feeds back and The phase of the product.
  • the values of i, j, and k can be specified by the second communication device to the first communication device, or by the first communication device to the second communication device, or can be determined by the first communication device based on the downlink reference signal resource configuration and SRS resource configuration indicated by the second communication device.
  • the specific implementation method can refer to the relevant introduction of explicit indication and implicit indication in the aforementioned embodiment, which will not be described in detail here.
  • the other relevant calculation steps corresponding to the specific channel element can refer to the corresponding calculation method in Figure 6, which will not be described in detail here.
  • phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment indicated by the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount can also be represented by the phase difference information between the channels of the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment, so as to improve the accuracy of the phase difference feedback amount.
  • the phase difference information between the above-mentioned channels is the phase information of the cross-correlation of the channels at the first moment and the second moment.
  • the channel at the first moment can be determined based on the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port in the first port set at the first moment
  • the channel at the second moment can be determined based on the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port in the first port set at the second moment.
  • the first communication device can perform channel estimation on the downlink channels corresponding to the antenna ports in the first port set based on the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment, respectively, and the channel at the first moment and the channel at the second moment can be obtained.
  • the channel at the first moment and the channel at the second moment can be represented by CSI or channel coefficients.
  • Cross-correlation can be used to represent the similarity between the channels at the first moment and the second moment, and the cross-correlation phase information of the channels is the phase difference between the channels at the first moment and the second moment calculated based on the cross-correlation algorithm.
  • the phase difference feedback amount ⁇ can satisfy the following relationship:
  • is the phase difference between the channels of the antenna ports of the first port set at the first moment and the second moment.
  • the arg function is used to calculate the phase of a complex number.
  • h 1 ,h 2 are column vectors consisting of the channels corresponding to the first port set, the second antenna port set, the first frequency domain position set/the first frequency domain basis set specified at the first moment and the second moment, respectively. is the row vector obtained by conjugate transpose of h 1 , Yes and the phase of the inner product of h 2.
  • the first communication device can feedback and the phase of the inner product of h2 .
  • the channel at the first moment and the channel at the second moment may be projected onto the same basis B, and then the phase change ⁇ of the cross-correlation of the estimated channel projections may be calculated.
  • the projection result corresponding to the channel h1 at the first moment and the channel h2 at the second moment is and The following relationship can be satisfied:
  • the basis B is an orthogonal matrix, satisfying B H B is the unit matrix, where B H is the conjugate transposed matrix of B. Accordingly, the phase change ⁇ of the cross-correlation of the estimated channel projections can satisfy the following relationship:
  • the arg function is used to take the phase of the complex number, yes The row vector obtained by conjugate transpose of Indicates taking and The phase of the inner product. Accordingly, the first communication device feedbacks and The phase of the inner product.
  • the first communication device uses a channel based on the received downlink reference signal or estimated based on the downlink reference signal.
  • the second communication device determines and compensates for the SRS random phase difference, it uses a channel estimated based on the received SRS.
  • the estimated channel may also correspond to a specific channel element.
  • the specific channel element reference may be made to the introduction in the aforementioned embodiment, which will not be elaborated herein.
  • the channel at the first moment and the channel at the second moment may be represented by corresponding CSI estimation results or channel coefficients (the channel coefficients may be partial coefficients in the CSI estimation results).
  • the cross-correlation of the channels is The phase information can be used to represent the phase difference information between the CSI estimation result at the first moment and the CSI estimation result at the second moment.
  • the phase difference feedback amount is determined based on the phase difference information, which can improve the accuracy of the phase difference feedback amount.
  • the phase information of the cross-correlation of the above channels can be used to represent the phase difference information between the channel coefficients at the first moment and the channel coefficients at the second moment, and the phase difference feedback amount is determined based on the phase difference information. If a channel coefficient that is less affected by noise interference generated by other signal features in the CSI is selected, the impact of noise interference can be reduced, and the accuracy of the phase difference feedback amount can be further improved.
  • the feedback information sent by the first communication device may include both the phase difference information between the above-mentioned downlink reference signals and the phase difference information between the above-mentioned channels.
  • the second communication device may perform channel prediction and downlink transmission based on any one or both of the above phase difference information, which is not limited here.
  • the feedback information sent by the first communication device may also include the phase of the downlink reference signal and/or the phase of the estimated channel at different times.
  • the first communication device may calculate the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount based on the phase of the received downlink reference signal and/or the phase of the estimated channel.
  • the downlink reference signal and/or the channel estimated based on the downlink reference signal is expressed as Then the phase of the downlink reference signal and/or the channel estimated based on the downlink reference signal can be expressed as ⁇ , and ⁇ can satisfy the following relationship:
  • f(h)(mod 2 ⁇ ) means to make f(h) modulo 2 ⁇ .
  • the method of feeding back the phase of the downlink reference signal and/or the phase of the estimated channel may also be applicable to specific channel elements.
  • specific channel elements please refer to the introduction in the aforementioned embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first communication device may respectively calculate and feed back the phase difference feedback amount corresponding to each first port set.
  • the following will take the compensation of the SRS random phase as an example, and will be described in detail in conjunction with Figures 7a and 7b.
  • Figure 7a is a scene schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 7b is an interactive schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the horizontal axis is time, and each square represents a time slot.
  • "D" represents a downlink slot
  • "S” represents a special slot
  • "U” represents an uplink slot.
  • the D subframe indicates that downlink data can be sent in the subframe
  • the S subframe indicates that the special fields downlink pilot time slot (downlink pilot time slot, DwPTS), guard period (guard period, GP), and uplink pilot time slot (uplink pilot time slot, UpPTS) are sent in the subframe.
  • the U subframe indicates that uplink data can be sent in the subframe. It can be understood that a subframe containing a slot is only an example provided by this application and is not limited here.
  • a network device corresponds to a terminal device.
  • the terminal device includes two antenna ports (antenna port 0 and antenna port 1), one transmit channel and two receive channels, that is, antenna port 0 and antenna port 1 cannot send SRS at the same time.
  • antenna port 0 is used to send SRS at the previous moment
  • antenna port 1 is used to send SRS at the next moment.
  • antenna port 0 and antenna port 1 do not have coherent capabilities and can correspond to two different first port sets respectively. It should be understood that the number of antenna ports and transmit/receive channel configuration of the terminal device shown in this embodiment is only an example and is not limited here.
  • the upward dotted arrow indicates the SRS resource of antenna port 0 of the terminal device
  • the upward solid arrow indicates the SRS resource of antenna port 1 of the terminal device
  • the downward solid arrow indicates the downlink reference signal resource (such as CSI-RS resource).
  • the downlink reference signal and SRS resource can be configured as follows: for each special slot, the SRS resources are configured for antenna port 0 and antenna port 1 respectively on the last two orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols (such as configuring SRS resources for antenna port 0 on the second-to-last OFDM symbol and configuring SRS resources for antenna port 1 on the first-to-last OFDM symbol), and a downlink reference signal resource of a downlink reference signal port is configured on the third-to-last OFDM symbol, and the SRS and the downlink reference signal are configured on multiple identical frequency domain subcarriers.
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • the second communication device may indicate the downlink reference signal configuration, SRS configuration, and phase difference feedback configuration to the first communication device through one or more indication information (such as the first indication information in the aforementioned embodiment).
  • indication information such as the first indication information in the aforementioned embodiment.
  • two phase difference feedback amounts may be configured in this embodiment.
  • the downlink reference signal port set corresponding to the first phase difference feedback amount (corresponding to the second port set in the aforementioned embodiment) is the downlink reference signal port of the third-to-last OFDM symbol
  • the corresponding SRS antenna port set (corresponding to the first port set in the aforementioned embodiment) is the downlink reference signal port of the third-to-last OFDM symbol.
  • the first frequency domain position set is antenna port 0, and the corresponding frequency index set (corresponding to the first frequency domain position set in the aforementioned embodiment) is the subcarrier index set of the downlink reference signal and SRS configuration.
  • the first frequency domain position set can be the intersection of the subcarrier index set of the downlink reference signal configuration and the subcarrier index set of the SRS configuration.
  • the downlink reference signal port set and frequency index set corresponding to the second phase difference feedback amount are the same as the first phase difference feedback amount, and the corresponding SRS antenna port set is antenna port 1.
  • the method is further described below by taking the phase difference feedback amount calculated based on the phase correlation of the downlink reference signals received at different times as an example.
  • the method may include the following steps:
  • the second communication device sends a downlink reference signal at a first time and a second time based on a downlink reference signal port.
  • the first communication device receives a downlink reference signal at a first time and a second time based on antenna port 0.
  • the first communication device calculates a phase difference feedback amount based on the downlink reference signal received by antenna port 0 at the first time and the second time.
  • the first communication device may calculate the phase difference feedback amount ⁇ based on y 1 and y 2 , where ⁇ may satisfy the following relationship:
  • the arg function is used to take the phase of the complex number, yes The row vector obtained by conjugate transpose of Indicates taking and The phase of the inner product. Accordingly, the first communication device feedbacks and The phase of the inner product.
  • the first communication device sends feedback information to the second communication device, where the feedback information is used to indicate the phase difference feedback amount.
  • the second communication device receives the phase difference feedback amount indicated by the feedback information.
  • the first communication device sends an SRS to the second communication device at a third time and a fourth time based on antenna port 0.
  • the second communication device receives the SRS at a third time and a fourth time based on a downlink reference signal port.
  • the time interval between the first moment and the third moment (corresponding to the first time difference in the aforementioned embodiment) and the time interval between the second moment and the fourth moment (corresponding to the second time difference in the aforementioned embodiment) should be as small as possible.
  • the execution order of sending the SRS at the fourth moment in S704 can be before or after S703 or S702, and can also be executed synchronously with S703, which is not limited here.
  • the second communication device calculates the phase difference information of the uplink channel based on the SRS at the third time and the fourth time received by the downlink reference signal port.
  • all antenna ports on the network device side can receive the SRS sent by antenna port 0 of the terminal device. Furthermore, the second communication device can determine the SRS that is consistent with the downlink reference signal beam direction received by the first communication device from the SRS received by all antenna ports, and calculate the projection in the downlink reference signal beam direction.
  • the second communication device uses a beam pointing to the first communication device to send a downlink reference signal, and the weight vector used for beamforming is p.
  • the SRS received by all antenna ports of the network device at the third moment and the fourth moment are S 1 and S 2 respectively.
  • phase difference information ⁇ ′ of the uplink channel can satisfy the following relationship:
  • the second communication device determines and compensates for the SRS random phase difference based on the phase difference information of the uplink channel and the above phase difference feedback amount.
  • phase difference information ⁇ ′ of the uplink channel includes both the phase change of the channel itself between two moments and the phase difference caused by the SRS random phase, and ⁇ ′- ⁇ can be used as an estimated value of the SRS random phase difference.
  • S 2 may not be compensated, and a channel containing the SRS random phase difference may be first estimated based on the SRS at the second moment, and then multiplied by e j( ⁇ - ⁇ ′) .
  • the second communication device compensates for the difference between the SRS random phase at each moment and the previous moment, and compensates in chronological order, so as to correct the differences between all SRS random phases and the SRS random phase at the previous moment in succession, thereby improving the accuracy of the channel prediction results.
  • the same method is used for the second phase difference feedback amount, and the second communication device can determine and compensate for the difference in the SRS random phase corresponding to the antenna port 1 of the terminal device, which will not be elaborated here.
  • the feedback information may include each phase difference feedback amount and the first port set, the second port set,
  • the correspondence between any one or more of the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set is to facilitate the second communication device to determine and compensate for the difference in the SRS random phase based on the correspondence.
  • each first communication device feeds back the phase change of the downlink reference signal at different times and does not feed back the estimated channel itself, the amount of calculation is small and the corresponding feedback overhead is also low, and high-precision phase feedback can be achieved using multiple bits.
  • the calculation formula corresponding to the second communication device when estimating the uplink channel and the calculation formula corresponding to the compensation of the SRS random phase difference may also be consistent with the calculation formula for calculating the phase feedback amount by the first communication device, so as to avoid calculation errors or complicated calculation process due to different calculation formulas, and improve the accuracy and efficiency of random phase difference compensation.
  • calculation formula for the phase difference feedback amount shown in this embodiment is only an example, and in fact, any calculation formula in the aforementioned embodiments can be adaptively selected.
  • Figure 8 is a scenario schematic diagram of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device includes two antenna ports (antenna port 0 and antenna port 1), and the entire bandwidth is divided into two frequency hopping bandwidths (frequency hopping bandwidth 1 and frequency hopping bandwidth 2).
  • Antenna port 0 and antenna port 1 send SRS by frequency hopping.
  • the upward dotted arrow indicates the SRS sent by the antenna port 0 of the terminal device
  • the upward solid arrow indicates the SRS sent by the antenna port 1 of the terminal device
  • the downward solid arrow indicates the downlink reference signal sent by the downlink reference signal port of the network device.
  • the configuration method of the downlink reference signal and SRS resources can be: on the third-to-last OFDM symbol of each special slot, the second communication device uses the antenna 0 of the network device to send a downlink reference signal (such as CSI-RS) over the entire bandwidth.
  • a downlink reference signal such as CSI-RS
  • the antenna port 0 of the terminal device sends SRS on the frequency hopping bandwidth 1, and does not send it on the frequency hopping bandwidth 2.
  • the antenna port 1 of the terminal device does not send it on the frequency hopping bandwidth 1, and sends SRS on the frequency hopping bandwidth 2.
  • the two antenna ports of the terminal device exchange the frequency hopping bandwidth for sending SRS.
  • the downlink reference signal and SRS occupy different subcarriers in the same bandwidth, but it can be guaranteed that the channel of all subcarriers in the bandwidth can be estimated by a specific channel estimation algorithm during channel estimation.
  • phase difference feedback quantities are configured, and the second communication device may send explicit indication information to the first communication device to indicate the antenna port and frequency hopping bandwidth on the terminal device side corresponding to each phase difference feedback quantity.
  • the above four phase difference feedback quantities may be respectively the phase of the cross-correlation of the channel estimated based on the downlink reference signal at antenna port 0 on frequency hopping bandwidth 1, the phase of the cross-correlation of the channel estimated based on the downlink reference signal at antenna port 0 on frequency hopping bandwidth 2, the phase of the cross-correlation of the channel estimated based on the downlink reference signal at antenna port 1 on frequency hopping bandwidth 1, and the phase of the cross-correlation of the channel estimated based on the downlink reference signal at antenna port 1 on frequency hopping bandwidth 2.
  • the specific implementation of displaying the indication information reference may be made to the introduction of the first indication information in the aforementioned embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the corresponding downlink reference signal port set is the downlink reference signal port corresponding to the third to last OFDM symbol mentioned above, and the downlink reference signal port corresponds to antenna 0 of the network device.
  • the corresponding terminal device antenna port set (first port set) is antenna port 0, and the corresponding frequency index set (first frequency domain position set) is the set of all subcarrier indexes within the frequency hopping bandwidth 1.
  • the first communication device receives a downlink reference signal at antenna port 0 and frequency hopping bandwidth 1, and estimates the downlink channel of antenna port 1 of the terminal device on all subcarriers included in frequency hopping bandwidth 1.
  • the two moments are h 1 and h 2 respectively.
  • the phase difference feedback amount ⁇ calculated by the first communication device can satisfy the following relationship:
  • the first communication device then feeds back the phase difference feedback amount ⁇ to the second communication device.
  • the second communication device estimates the uplink channels of all subcarriers included in antenna port 0 and frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the terminal device based on the SRS received by the network device antenna 0 on the second to last OFDM symbol in the special slot.
  • the second communication device can determine and compensate for the difference in SRS random phase of antenna port 0 and frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the terminal device.
  • the method used to determine and compensate for the difference in random phase can correspond to the relevant introduction of the embodiment corresponding to reference Figure 6, which will not be described in detail here.
  • the other three phase difference feedback amounts are based on the same method to respectively determine and compensate for the difference in SRS random phase of antenna port 0 of the terminal device on frequency hopping bandwidth 2, the difference in SRS random phase of antenna port 1 of the terminal device on frequency hopping bandwidth 1, and the difference in SRS random phase of antenna port 1 of the terminal device on frequency hopping bandwidth 2, which will not be described in detail here.
  • phase difference feedback amounts can be configured for different antenna ports and different frequency hopping bandwidths of the terminal device, respectively.
  • the phase difference feedback amounts correspond to the SRS sent by different antenna ports and different frequency hopping bandwidths of the terminal device, respectively, and are applicable to scenarios where multiple antenna ports of the terminal device do not have coherence capabilities between multiple frequency hoppings.
  • the first communication device only needs to receive a downlink reference signal sent by a downlink reference signal port, which can reduce the downlink reference signal overhead. And by first estimating the channels on all subcarriers and then calculating the phase difference feedback amount, it is applicable to scenarios where the downlink reference signal and SRS are configured in the same bandwidth but on different subcarriers.
  • phase difference feedback amount Under low signal-to-noise ratio, compared with directly calculating the phase difference of the downlink reference signal, the phase difference feedback amount has higher accuracy, and the feedback overhead is very low, and high-precision phase feedback can be achieved using multiple bits.
  • calculation formula for the phase difference feedback amount shown in this embodiment is only an example, and in fact, any calculation formula in the aforementioned embodiments can be adaptively selected.
  • channel estimation can be performed based on the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port in each first port set, and the estimated channel is spliced and then the phase difference feedback amount is calculated, so that each antenna port in the first port set shares the phase difference feedback amount, thereby reducing feedback overhead.
  • Figure 9a is a scene diagram of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 9b is an interaction diagram based on the communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the horizontal axis is time, and each square represents a time slot.
  • "D" represents a downlink slot
  • "S” represents a special slot
  • "U” represents an uplink slot.
  • the D subframe indicates that downlink data can be sent in the subframe
  • the S subframe indicates that the special fields DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS are sent in the subframe.
  • the U subframe indicates that uplink data can be sent in the subframe. It can be understood that a subframe containing a slot is only an example provided by this application and is not limited here.
  • the terminal device includes 4 antenna ports (antenna port 0, antenna port 1, antenna port 2, antenna port 3), 2 transmit channels and 4 receive channels.
  • antenna port 0 and antenna port 1 are used to send SRS at the previous moment
  • antenna port 2 and antenna port 3 are used to send SRS at the next moment.
  • antenna port 0 and antenna port 1 have coherent capabilities and can be included in a first port set
  • antenna port 2 and antenna port 3 have coherent capabilities and can be included in another first port set. It should be understood that the number of antenna ports and transmit/receive channel configuration of the terminal device shown in this embodiment is only an example and is not limited here.
  • the upward dotted arrow indicates the SRS resources of antenna port 0 and antenna port 1 of the terminal device
  • the upward solid arrow indicates the SRS resources of antenna port 2 and antenna port 3 of the terminal device
  • the downward solid arrow indicates the downlink reference signal resources (such as CSI-RS resources).
  • the downlink reference signal and SRS resources can be configured as follows: for each special slot, SRS resources are configured for antenna ports 0 and 1 and antenna ports 2 and 3 respectively on the last two OFDM symbols (such as configuring SRS resources for antenna ports 0 and 1 on the second-to-last OFDM symbol, and configuring SRS resources for antenna ports 2 and 3 on the first-to-last OFDM symbol), and a downlink reference signal resource of a downlink reference signal port is configured on the third-to-last OFDM symbol, and the SRS and the downlink reference signal are configured on multiple identical frequency domain subcarriers.
  • the second communication device indicates the downlink reference signal configuration and SRS configuration to the first communication device, and then indicates the configuration of the phase difference feedback amount in an implicit manner, that is, no additional indication information for indicating the configuration of the phase difference feedback amount (corresponding to the first indication information in the aforementioned embodiment) is sent. Accordingly, the first communication device can determine the configuration of the phase difference feedback amount based on the downlink reference signal configuration and SRS configuration.
  • the specific implementation of the implicit indication can be referred to the relevant introduction of S405 to S407 in the aforementioned embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the downlink reference signal port set corresponding to the first phase difference feedback amount (corresponding to the second port set in the aforementioned embodiment) is the downlink reference signal port of the third-to-last OFDM symbol
  • the corresponding SRS antenna port set (corresponding to the first port set in the aforementioned embodiment) is antenna ports 0 and 1
  • the corresponding frequency index set (corresponding to the first frequency domain position set in the aforementioned embodiment) is the subcarrier index set of the downlink reference signal and SRS configuration (corresponding to the second frequency domain position set and the third frequency domain position set in the aforementioned embodiment).
  • the first frequency domain position set can be the intersection of the subcarrier index set of the downlink reference signal configuration and the subcarrier index set of the SRS configuration.
  • the downlink reference signal port set and frequency index set corresponding to the second phase difference feedback amount are the same as the first phase difference feedback amount, and the corresponding SRS antenna port set is antenna ports 2 and 3.
  • the method is further described below by taking the phase difference feedback amount calculated based on the phase of the cross-correlation of the channel estimated at different times as an example. Please refer to FIG. 9b. Based on the application scenario shown in FIG. 9a, the method may include the following steps:
  • the second communication device sends a downlink reference signal at a first time and a second time based on a downlink reference signal port.
  • the first communication device receives a downlink reference signal at a first time and a second time based on antenna ports 0 and 1.
  • the time between the time when the second communication device sends the downlink reference signal and the time when the first communication device receives the downlink reference signal There is a delay.
  • the instant of sending a downlink reference signal and the instant of receiving the downlink reference signal are described as the first instant and the second instant.
  • the first communication device calculates a phase difference feedback amount based on downlink reference signals received by antenna ports 0 and 1 at the first time and the second time.
  • (h PORT0 ) T is the transpose of h PORT0
  • (h PORT1 ) T is the transpose of h PORT1 .
  • phase difference feedback amount ⁇ can satisfy the following relationship:
  • the arg function is used to take the phase of the complex number, is the row vector obtained by conjugate transpose of h 1 , Indicates taking The phase of the inner product with h 2 , correspondingly, the first communication device feedback The phase of the inner product with h 2 .
  • S903 The first communication device sends the phase difference feedback value to the second communication device.
  • the second communication device receives the phase difference feedback value.
  • the first communication device sends SRS to the second communication device at the third time and the fourth time based on antenna ports 0 and 1.
  • the second communication device receives SRS at the third time and the fourth time based on the downlink reference signal port.
  • the second communication device calculates the phase difference information of the uplink channel based on the SRS at the third time and the fourth time received by the downlink reference signal port.
  • the second communication device can perform channel estimation on the uplink channels corresponding to antenna port 0 and antenna port 1 based on the SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment, respectively, and splice the channel estimation results of the two ports at the same moment, and correspondingly calculate the phase difference information of the spliced channel at the third moment and the fourth moment.
  • the specific implementation of calculating the phase difference information can be referred to the relevant introduction of S603 in the aforementioned embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the second communication device determines and compensates for the SRS random phase difference based on the phase difference information of the uplink channel and the phase difference feedback amount.
  • calculation formula for the phase difference feedback amount shown in this embodiment is only an example, and in fact, any calculation formula in the aforementioned embodiments can be adaptively selected.
  • multiple antenna ports applicable to the terminal device are divided into multiple groups (each group corresponds to a first port set).
  • a phase difference feedback amount can be used to solve the common random phase difference of a group of antenna ports. Compared with feeding back a phase difference feedback amount for each antenna port, shared phase difference feedback amount can be achieved, and the feedback overhead is lower.
  • the present application divides the functional modules of the communication device according to the above method embodiment.
  • each functional module can be divided according to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the present application is schematic and is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation.
  • the communication device of the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail below in conjunction with Figures 10 to 12.
  • FIG10 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device includes a processing unit 1003 , a sending unit 1001 and a receiving unit 1002 .
  • the communication device may be the first communication device shown above. That is, the communication device shown in FIG. 10 may be used to execute the steps or functions performed by the first communication device in the above method embodiment.
  • the first communication device may be a beamforming transmission device or chip, etc., which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the receiving unit 1002 is configured to receive a downlink reference signal from the second communication device
  • the sending unit 1001 is configured to send feedback information (or a phase difference feedback amount) to a second communication device.
  • the processing unit 1003 is used to generate feedback information (or phase difference feedback amount).
  • the first indication information For example, the processing unit 1003 is further configured to process a downlink reference signal to obtain an estimated channel.
  • the processing unit 1003 is further configured to control the sending unit 1001 to output feedback information (or a phase difference feedback amount).
  • processing unit 1003 is further configured to generate an SRS.
  • the sending unit 1001 is further configured to send an SRS to a second communication device.
  • the sending unit 1001 can also be used to execute the sending steps in S604 and S606 corresponding to Figure 6
  • the receiving unit 1002 is also used to execute the receiving steps in S601 and S602 corresponding to Figure 6
  • the processing unit 1003 can also be used to execute S603 corresponding to Figure 6.
  • the communication device may be the second communication device shown above. That is, the communication device shown in Figure 10 may be used to execute the steps or functions performed by the second communication device in the above method embodiment.
  • the second communication device may be a beamforming receiving device or chip, etc., which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the sending unit 1001 is configured to send a downlink reference signal to a first communication device
  • the receiving unit 1002 is configured to receive feedback information (or a phase difference feedback amount) from a first communication device;
  • the processing unit 1003 is used to generate first indication information.
  • the processing unit 1003 is further configured to generate phase difference information of an uplink channel.
  • the receiving unit 1002 is further configured to receive an SRS from the first communication device, and receive feedback information (or a phase difference feedback amount) from the first communication device.
  • the processing unit 1003 is further configured to process the SRS.
  • the processing unit 1003 may perform channel estimation according to the SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment to determine the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount.
  • the processing unit 1003 is further configured to determine and compensate for a difference in a random phase of an SRS.
  • the receiving unit 1002 can also be used to execute the receiving steps in S604 and S606 corresponding to Figure 6; the processing unit 1003 can also be used to execute S605 and S607 corresponding to Figure 6, and the sending unit 1001 is also used to execute the sending steps in S601 and S602 corresponding to Figure 6.
  • the first communication device and the second communication device of the embodiment of the present application are introduced above, and the possible product forms of the first communication device and the second communication device are introduced below. It should be understood that any product having the functions of the first communication device described in FIG. 10 above, or any product having the functions of the second communication device described in FIG. 10 above, falls within the protection scope of the embodiment of the present application. It should also be understood that the following introduction is only an example, and does not limit the product forms of the first communication device and the second communication device of the embodiment of the present application to this.
  • the processing unit 1003 may be one or more processors, the sending unit 1001 may be a transmitter, the receiving unit 1002 may be a receiver, or the sending unit 1001 and the receiving unit 1002 may be integrated into one device, such as a transceiver.
  • the processing unit 1003 may be one or more processors (or the processing unit 1003 may be one or more logic circuits), the sending unit 1001 may be an output interface, the receiving unit 1002 may be an input interface, or the sending unit 1001 and the receiving unit 1002 may be integrated into one unit, such as an input-output interface. This will be described in detail below.
  • the processing unit 1003 may be one or more processors, and the sending unit 1001 and the receiving unit 1002 may be integrated into a transceiver.
  • the processor and the transceiver may be coupled, etc., and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the connection method between the processor and the transceiver.
  • the communication device 1100 includes one or more processors 1102 and a transceiver 1101 .
  • the transceiver 1101 when the communication device is used to execute the steps, methods or functions executed by the first communication device, the transceiver 1101 is used to send feedback information to the second communication device and receive a downlink reference signal from the second communication device.
  • the processor 1102 is used to perform channel estimation according to the downlink reference signal.
  • the transceiver 1101 is also used to send an SRS and first indication information to the second communication device.
  • the transceiver 1101 when the communication device is used to execute the steps, methods or functions executed by the second communication device, the transceiver 1101 is used to send a downlink reference signal to the first communication device and receive feedback information from the first communication device. For generating the first indication information, the phase difference information of the uplink channel, etc.
  • the transceiver 1101 is further configured to receive the SRS from the first communication device, and the first indication information, etc.
  • the processor 1102 is further configured to process the SRS.
  • the transceiver may include a receiver and a transmitter, wherein the receiver is used to perform a receiving function (or operation) and the transmitter is used to perform a transmitting function (or operation).
  • the transceiver is used to communicate with other devices/devices via a transmission medium.
  • the communication device 1100 may also include one or more memories 1103 for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the memory 1103 is coupled to the processor 1102.
  • the coupling in the embodiment of the present application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
  • the processor 1102 may operate in conjunction with the memory 1103.
  • the processor 1102 may execute program instructions stored in the memory 1103.
  • at least one of the one or more memories may be included in the processor.
  • connection medium between the above-mentioned transceiver 1101, processor 1102 and memory 1103 is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 1103, processor 1102 and transceiver 1101 are connected through a bus 1104.
  • the bus is represented by a bold line in FIG. 11.
  • the connection mode between other components is only for schematic illustration and is not limited thereto.
  • the bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, etc. For ease of representation, only one bold line is used in FIG. 11, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application-specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, a discrete hardware component, etc., and may implement or execute the methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor, etc.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed by a hardware processor, or may be executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor, etc.
  • the memory may include, but is not limited to, non-volatile memories such as hard disk drive (HDD) or solid-state drive (SSD), random access memory (RAM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), read-only memory (ROM) or portable read-only memory (CD-ROM), etc.
  • the memory is any storage medium that can be used to carry or store program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and can be read and/or written by a computer (such as the communication device shown in the present application), but is not limited to this.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application can also be a circuit or any other device that can realize a storage function, which is used to store program instructions and/or data.
  • the processor 1102 is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire communication device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the memory 1103 is mainly used to store the software program and data.
  • the transceiver 1101 may include a control circuit and an antenna.
  • the control circuit is mainly used to convert the baseband signal and the radio frequency signal and process the radio frequency signal.
  • the antenna is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • the input and output devices such as a touch screen, a display screen, a keyboard, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by the user and output data to the user.
  • the processor 1102 can read the software program in the memory 1103, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor 1102 performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and then sends the radio frequency signal outward in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor 1102.
  • the processor 1102 converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • the RF circuit and antenna may be arranged independently of the processor performing baseband processing.
  • the RF circuit and antenna may be arranged independently of the communication device in a remote manner.
  • the communication device shown in the embodiment of the present application may also have more components than those in FIG11, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
  • the method performed by the processor and transceiver shown above is only an example, and the specific steps performed by the processor and transceiver can refer to the method described above.
  • the processing unit 1003 may be one or more logic circuits.
  • the sending unit 1001 may be an output interface, and the receiving unit 1002 may be an input interface.
  • the sending unit 1001 and the receiving unit 1002 may be integrated into one unit, such as an input-output interface.
  • the input-output interface may also be called a communication interface, or an interface circuit, or an interface, etc.
  • the communication device shown in FIG12 includes a logic circuit 1201 and an interface 1202. That is, the above-mentioned processing unit 801 may be implemented with a logic circuit 1201, and the sending unit 1001 and the receiving unit 1002 may be implemented with an interface 1202.
  • the logic circuit 1201 may be a chip, a processing circuit, an integrated circuit or a system on chip (SoC) chip, etc.
  • the interface 1202 may be a communication interface, an input-output interface, a pin, etc.
  • FIG12 is shown by taking the above-mentioned communication device as a chip as an example, and the chip includes a logic circuit 1201 and an interface 1202.
  • the logic circuit and the interface may also be coupled to each other.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific connection method between the logic circuit and the interface.
  • the interface 1202 is used to output feedback information and input a downlink reference signal.
  • the logic circuit 1201 is used to perform channel estimation etc. according to the downlink reference signal.
  • the logic circuit 1201 is further used to generate an SRS, and the interface 1202 is further used to output the SRS.
  • the interface 1202 when the communication device is used to execute the method, function or step executed by the second communication device, the interface 1202 is used to input feedback information and output a downlink reference signal.
  • the logic circuit 1201 is used to generate a downlink reference signal.
  • the interface 1202 is also used to input feedback information, and the logic circuit 1201 is also used to process the feedback information.
  • the interface 1202 is also used to input SRS, and the logic circuit 1201 is also used to process the SRS (such as performing channel estimation based on the SRS, etc.).
  • the communication device shown in the embodiment of the present application can implement the method provided in the embodiment of the present application in the form of hardware, or can implement the method provided in the embodiment of the present application in the form of software, etc., and the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
  • the present application also provides a computer program, which is used to implement the operations and/or processing performed by the first communication device in the method provided by the present application.
  • the present application also provides a computer program, which is used to implement the operations and/or processing performed by the second communication device in the method provided by the present application.
  • the present application also provides a computer storage medium, in which a computer program is stored.
  • the computer program includes program instructions.
  • the processor executes the operations and/or processing performed by the first communication device in the method provided in the present application.
  • the present application also provides a computer storage medium, in which a computer program is stored.
  • the computer program includes program instructions.
  • the processor executes the operations and/or processing performed by the second communication device in the method provided in the present application.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, which includes a computer program or a computer code.
  • a computer program product which includes a computer program or a computer code.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, which includes a computer program or a computer code.
  • a computer program product which includes a computer program or a computer code.
  • the present application also provides a communication system, including a terminal device and a network device, wherein the terminal device and the network device can be used to execute the method in any of the aforementioned embodiments.
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, or it can be an electrical, mechanical or other form of connection.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the technical effects of the solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
  • the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a readable storage medium, including a number of instructions to enable a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned readable storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Radio Transmission System (AREA)

Abstract

The present application relates to the technical field of communications. Disclosed are a communication method and a related product. The method comprises: respectively receiving downlink reference signals at a first moment and a second moment on the basis of at least one first port set, wherein the first port set comprises one or more antenna ports; and sending feedback information, wherein the feedback information is used for indicating a plurality of phase difference feedback quantities; each phase difference feedback quantity corresponds to one of the at least one first port set; and the phase difference feedback quantities are used for indicating phase difference information between downlink reference signals, which are received by the antenna ports in the corresponding first port set at the first moment and the second moment. The method provided in the present application can improve the performance of channel prediction.

Description

通信方法及相关产品Communication methods and related products
本申请要求于2022年09月30日提交中国专利局、申请号为202211215713.0、申请名称为“通信方法及相关产品”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application filed with the China Patent Office on September 30, 2022, with application number 202211215713.0 and application name “Communication Methods and Related Products”, all contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.
技术领域Technical Field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及相关产品。The present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and related products.
背景技术Background technique
在时分双工(time-division duplex,TDD)大规模多天线(massive multiple-input multiple-output,mMIMO)系统中,网络设备需要获取下行信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI),来计算下行数据传输的权值,以实现高速的下行数据传输。In a time-division duplex (TDD) massive multiple-input multiple-output (mMIMO) system, network devices need to obtain downlink channel state information (CSI) to calculate the weight of downlink data transmission to achieve high-speed downlink data transmission.
目前,网络设备可通过测量终端设备发送的探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS),估计出上行CSI,并基于TDD mMIMO的信道互易性,得到同一时刻的下行CSI。当终端设备移动速度较快时,会发生CSI老化问题。CSI老化指的是信道随时间发生变化,未来时刻用于下行数据传输的下行信道相比当前时刻基于SRS和信道互易性得到的CSI发生变化,CSI不准确,影响数据传输的性能。目前,网络设备为了缓解CSI老化的问题,需要基于过去的多个时刻的SRS估计得到的上行CSI,分析CSI随时间变化的规律,预测未来时刻的下行CSI。Currently, network equipment can estimate the uplink CSI by measuring the sounding reference signal (SRS) sent by the terminal device, and obtain the downlink CSI at the same time based on the channel reciprocity of TDD mMIMO. When the terminal device moves at a fast speed, CSI aging problem will occur. CSI aging refers to the change of the channel over time. The downlink channel used for downlink data transmission at a future moment is different from the CSI obtained based on SRS and channel reciprocity at the current moment. The CSI is inaccurate, affecting the performance of data transmission. At present, in order to alleviate the problem of CSI aging, network equipment needs to estimate the uplink CSI based on the SRS at multiple moments in the past, analyze the law of CSI change over time, and predict the downlink CSI at future moments.
但在以上方式中,由于终端设备发送链路硬件的不理想性,终端设备发送的SRS会与实际的SRS产生偏差,导致网络设备估计的上行CSI的准确度较低,导致网络设备难以分析CSI随时间变化的规律,从而降低网络设备信道预测的性能。However, in the above method, due to the non-ideal nature of the terminal device's sending link hardware, the SRS sent by the terminal device will deviate from the actual SRS, resulting in low accuracy of the uplink CSI estimated by the network device, making it difficult for the network device to analyze how the CSI changes over time, thereby reducing the performance of the network device's channel prediction.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例公开了一种通信方法及相关产品,能够提高信道预测的性能。The embodiments of the present application disclose a communication method and related products, which can improve the performance of channel prediction.
第一方面,本申请实施例公开了一种通信方法,所述方法包括:基于至少一个第一端口集合,分别在第一时刻和第二时刻接收下行参考信号;所述第一端口集合包括一个或多个天线端口;发送反馈信息,所述反馈信息用于指示多个相位差反馈量;每个所述相位差反馈量对应所述至少一个第一端口集合中的一个;所述相位差反馈量用于指示其对应的所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application discloses a communication method, the method comprising: based on at least one first port set, receiving a downlink reference signal at a first moment and a second moment respectively; the first port set comprises one or more antenna ports; sending feedback information, the feedback information being used to indicate a plurality of phase difference feedback amounts; each of the phase difference feedback amounts corresponds to one of the at least one first port set; the phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signal received by the corresponding antenna port in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment.
在本申请实施例中,上述天线端口可以是实体的物理天线端口,也可以是虚拟的逻辑天线端口。可以理解的,若终端设备仅包含一个第一端口集合,则该第一端口集合可对应上述反馈信息指示的多个相位差反馈量,若该终端设备包含两个或两个以上第一端口集合,则每个第一端口集合可对应一个或多个相位差反馈量。In the embodiment of the present application, the antenna port may be a physical antenna port or a virtual logical antenna port. It is understandable that if the terminal device includes only one first port set, the first port set may correspond to multiple phase difference feedback amounts indicated by the feedback information, and if the terminal device includes two or more first port sets, each first port set may correspond to one or more phase difference feedback amounts.
可选的,若终端设备仅包含一个第一端口集合,则该第一端口集合也可对应一个相位差反馈量,对应的,上述反馈信息可以用于指示该相位差反馈量。示例性的,该第一端口集合包含一个天线端口或包含具有相干能力的多个天线端口,若第一端口集合中的每个天线端口对应的信道具有相同或相近的随时间变化的规律,则每个天线端口在不同时刻(如第一时刻和第二时刻)对应的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息也是相同或相近的,因此上述反馈信息可以仅包含一个相位差反馈量,该相位差反馈量用于指示上述相同或相近的相位差信息,以减少相位差反馈量的反馈开销。Optionally, if the terminal device includes only one first port set, the first port set may also correspond to one phase difference feedback amount, and correspondingly, the above feedback information may be used to indicate the phase difference feedback amount. Exemplarily, the first port set includes one antenna port or includes multiple antenna ports with coherence capability. If the channel corresponding to each antenna port in the first port set has the same or similar time-varying law, then the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals corresponding to each antenna port at different times (such as the first time and the second time) is also the same or similar, so the above feedback information may include only one phase difference feedback amount, which is used to indicate the above same or similar phase difference information, so as to reduce the feedback overhead of the phase difference feedback amount.
一般的,对上行信道估计结果来说,其相位信息中不仅包含因终端设备发射机硬件原因(如射频链路的开启/关断、射频链路发送功率变化等)产生的随机相位的信息,还包含因信道本身随时间变化导致的相位变化。而在本申请中,由于下行参考信号一般不包含因发射机硬件原因产生的随机相位,上述相位差反馈量所指示的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息,可以反映出第一端口集合中的天线端口所对应的下行信道本身在第一时刻和第二时刻之间发生的变化,因此在将同一时刻的上行信道和下行信道视为相同的信道的情况下(如上行信道和下行信道满足互易性时),下行信道本身在第一时刻和第二时刻之间发生的变化可以等效于上行信道本身在该第一时刻和该第二时刻之间发生的变化。进一步的,基于上述相位差反馈量,可以排除上行信道估计结果中因上行信道本身随时间变化导致的相位变化,继而可以确定上述因终端设备发射机硬件原因产生的随机相位的信息,有助于提高信道预测的准确度。Generally, for the uplink channel estimation result, its phase information not only includes the random phase information generated by the hardware of the terminal device transmitter (such as the opening/closing of the RF link, the change of the transmission power of the RF link, etc.), but also includes the phase change caused by the change of the channel itself over time. In the present application, since the downlink reference signal generally does not include the random phase generated by the transmitter hardware, the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals indicated by the above phase difference feedback amount can reflect the change of the downlink channel itself corresponding to the antenna port in the first port set between the first moment and the second moment. Therefore, when the uplink channel and the downlink channel at the same moment are regarded as the same channel (such as when the uplink channel and the downlink channel meet reciprocity), the change of the downlink channel itself between the first moment and the second moment can be equivalent to the change of the uplink channel itself between the first moment and the second moment. Further, based on the above phase difference feedback amount, the phase change caused by the change of the uplink channel itself over time in the uplink channel estimation result can be excluded, and then the above random phase information caused by the hardware of the terminal device transmitter can be determined, which helps to improve the accuracy of channel prediction.
结合第一方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述每个所述相位差反馈量用于指示其对应的所述第一端 口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息包括如下至少一项:所述相位差反馈量用于指示其对应的所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息;所述下行参考信号之间的相位差信息是所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号的互相关的相位信息;所述相位差反馈量用于指示其对应的所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻的信道之间的相位差信息;所述信道之间的相位差信息是所述第一时刻的信道与所述第二时刻的信道的互相关的相位信息;所述第一时刻的信道是基于所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻接收的下行参考信号确定的,所述第二时刻的信道是基于所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号确定的。In combination with the first aspect, in an optional implementation manner, each of the phase difference feedback amounts is used to indicate the first end corresponding to it. The phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment includes at least one of the following items: the phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the corresponding antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment; the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals is the phase information of the cross-correlation of the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment; the phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the channels of the corresponding antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment; the phase difference information between the channels is the phase information of the cross-correlation of the channels at the first moment and the channels at the second moment; the channel at the first moment is determined based on the downlink reference signal received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment, and the channel at the second moment is determined based on the downlink reference signal received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the second moment.
可理解的,互相关可用于表示第一时刻与第二时刻的测量信号(如下行参考信号或估计的信道)之间的相似性。上述下行参考信号的互相关的相位信息为基于互相关算法计算得到的第一时刻与第二时刻的下行参考信号之间的相位差,同样的,上述信道的互相关的相位信息为基于互相关算法计算得到的第一时刻与第二时刻的信道之间的相位差。It can be understood that the cross-correlation can be used to indicate the similarity between the measurement signal (such as the downlink reference signal or the estimated channel) at the first moment and the second moment. The phase information of the cross-correlation of the downlink reference signal is the phase difference between the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the second moment calculated based on the cross-correlation algorithm. Similarly, the phase information of the cross-correlation of the channel is the phase difference between the channel at the first moment and the second moment calculated based on the cross-correlation algorithm.
在本实施例中,反馈不同时刻的下行参考信号的互相关的相位信息,可以缩减相位差反馈量的计算过程,降低计算开销。可选的,反馈不同时刻的信道的互相关的相位信息,其中上述第一时刻的信道和上述第二时刻的信道可以用相应的CSI估计结果或信道系数(信道系数可以是该CSI估计结果中的部分系数)表示。示例性的,若用CSI估计结果表示,则上述信道的互相关的相位信息可以用于表示第一时刻的CSI估计结果与第二时刻的CSI估计结果之间的相位差信息,基于该相位差信息确定相位差反馈量。如果选取了受到CSI中其它信号特征产生的噪声干扰影响较小的信道系数,可以降低噪声干扰的影响,进一步提高相位差反馈量的准确度。In this embodiment, the phase information of the mutual correlation of the downlink reference signals at different times is fed back, which can shorten the calculation process of the phase difference feedback amount and reduce the calculation overhead. Optionally, the phase information of the mutual correlation of the channels at different times is fed back, wherein the channel at the first moment and the channel at the second moment can be represented by the corresponding CSI estimation result or channel coefficient (the channel coefficient can be a partial coefficient in the CSI estimation result). Exemplarily, if represented by the CSI estimation result, the phase information of the mutual correlation of the above channels can be used to represent the phase difference information between the CSI estimation result at the first moment and the CSI estimation result at the second moment, and the phase difference feedback amount is determined based on the phase difference information. If a channel coefficient that is less affected by the noise interference generated by other signal characteristics in the CSI is selected, the influence of noise interference can be reduced, and the accuracy of the phase difference feedback amount can be further improved.
结合第一方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:基于所述至少一个第一端口集合,在第三时刻和第四时刻发送SRS;所述第一时刻与所述第三时刻的时间间隔为第一时间差,所述第二时刻与所述第四时刻的时间间隔为第二时间差;所述相位差反馈量对应一个所述第三时刻和一个所述第四时刻。In combination with the first aspect, in an optional implementation, the method further includes: based on the at least one first port set, sending SRS at a third moment and a fourth moment; the time interval between the first moment and the third moment is a first time difference, and the time interval between the second moment and the fourth moment is a second time difference; the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to one third moment and one fourth moment.
应当理解,同一下行参考信号对应的发送时刻和接收时刻之间是存在一定时延的,在本申请中为了便于描述,将下行参考信号的发送时刻和接收时刻均描述为第一时刻和第二时刻,同样的,将SRS的发送时刻和接收时刻均描述为第三时刻和第四时刻。第一时刻、第二时刻、第三时刻、第四时刻也可以分别是一个时间单元,如第一时间单元、第二时间单元、第三时间单元、第四时间单元。具体可以是一个OFDM符号或两个OFDM符号等。本申请中其它关于时刻的描述也可以是上面描述的时间单元。It should be understood that there is a certain delay between the sending time and receiving time corresponding to the same downlink reference signal. In this application, for the convenience of description, the sending time and receiving time of the downlink reference signal are described as the first time and the second time. Similarly, the sending time and receiving time of the SRS are described as the third time and the fourth time. The first time, the second time, the third time, and the fourth time can also be a time unit, such as the first time unit, the second time unit, the third time unit, and the fourth time unit. Specifically, it can be one OFDM symbol or two OFDM symbols. Other descriptions of time in this application can also be the time units described above.
结合第一方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一时间差小于第一阈值,所述第二时间差小于所述第一阈值;或者,所述第一时间差小于或等于所述第一阈值,所述第二时间差小于或等于所述第一阈值。In combination with the first aspect, in an optional implementation, the first time difference is less than a first threshold, and the second time difference is less than the first threshold; or, the first time difference is less than or equal to the first threshold, and the second time difference is less than or equal to the first threshold.
可以理解的,由于信道会随着时间发生变化,因此,为了满足上行信道与下行信道之间的互易性,即为了使相位差反馈量所反映的下行信道本身在第一时刻和第二时刻之间的变化可以等效于上行信道本身在该第三时刻和该第四时刻之间发生的变化,下行参考信号的发送时刻与SRS的发送时刻之间的时间间隔应当尽可能的小,即第一时间差和第二时间差应当尽可能的小,因此本实施例通过设置时间上限(第一阈值)的方式约束第一时间差和第二时间差,可以避免因上述时间间隔过长导致的相位差反馈量准确度低的问题。可选的,上述第一时间差和上述第二时间差的时间下限可基于通信协议帧结构的约束,以及下行参考信号处理时序的约束(如基于该下行参考信号确定相位差反馈量的时序约束,或基于该下行参考信号确定对应的信道的时序约束)确定。It can be understood that since the channel changes over time, in order to satisfy the reciprocity between the uplink channel and the downlink channel, that is, in order to make the change of the downlink channel itself reflected by the phase difference feedback amount between the first moment and the second moment equivalent to the change of the uplink channel itself between the third moment and the fourth moment, the time interval between the sending moment of the downlink reference signal and the sending moment of the SRS should be as small as possible, that is, the first time difference and the second time difference should be as small as possible. Therefore, this embodiment constrains the first time difference and the second time difference by setting a time upper limit (first threshold), which can avoid the problem of low accuracy of the phase difference feedback amount caused by the above-mentioned time interval being too long. Optionally, the time lower limit of the above-mentioned first time difference and the above-mentioned second time difference can be determined based on the constraints of the communication protocol frame structure, and the constraints of the downlink reference signal processing timing (such as the timing constraints of determining the phase difference feedback amount based on the downlink reference signal, or the timing constraints of determining the corresponding channel based on the downlink reference signal).
结合第一方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一阈值满足如下任意一项:所述第一阈值等于第三时间差的四分之一,所述第三时间差为所述第三时刻与所述第四时刻的时间间隔;所述第一阈值等于所述第三时间差的五分之一;所述第一阈值等于所述第三时间差的八分之一;所述第一阈值等于5个时隙的时间;所述第一阈值等于2个时隙的时间;所述第一阈值等于1个时隙的时间。In combination with the first aspect, in an optional embodiment, the first threshold satisfies any one of the following: the first threshold is equal to one quarter of the third time difference, and the third time difference is the time interval between the third moment and the fourth moment; the first threshold is equal to one fifth of the third time difference; the first threshold is equal to one eighth of the third time difference; the first threshold is equal to 5 time slots; the first threshold is equal to 2 time slots; the first threshold is equal to 1 time slot.
可以理解的,时隙可基于子载波间隔确定,示例性的,在第五代(5th-generation,5G)新无线(new radio,NR)标准的规范下,若子载波间隔为15KHz,则对应的时隙可以是1毫秒,若子载波间隔为30KHz,则对应的时隙可以是0.5毫秒。It can be understood that the time slot can be determined based on the subcarrier spacing. For example, under the specifications of the fifth-generation (5th-generation, 5G) new radio (new radio, NR) standard, if the subcarrier spacing is 15KHz, the corresponding time slot can be 1 millisecond, and if the subcarrier spacing is 30KHz, the corresponding time slot can be 0.5 milliseconds.
结合第一方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述相位差反馈量用于补偿在所述第三时刻发送的SRS对应的随机相位与在所述第四时刻发送的SRS对应的随机相位之间的差。In combination with the first aspect, in an optional implementation, the phase difference feedback amount is used to compensate for a difference between a random phase corresponding to the SRS sent at the third moment and a random phase corresponding to the SRS sent at the fourth moment.
可理解的,每个相位差反馈量可以用于补偿第一端口集合、第二端口集合和第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合共同对应的第三时刻SRS对应的随机相位和第四时刻对应的随机相位的差。It is understandable that each phase difference feedback amount can be used to compensate for the difference between the random phase corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the random phase corresponding to the fourth moment corresponding to the first port set, the second port set and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set.
结合第一方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述相位差反馈量对应一个第二端口集合;所述第二端口 集合包括一个或多个下行参考信号端口;所述相位差反馈量对应一个第一频域位置集合或对应一个第一频域基底集合;所述第一频域位置集合包括一个或多个频域位置,所述第一频域基底集合包括一个或多个频域基底。In combination with the first aspect, in an optional implementation manner, the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to a second port set; the second port The set includes one or more downlink reference signal ports; the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to a first frequency domain position set or corresponds to a first frequency domain basis set; the first frequency domain position set includes one or more frequency domain positions, and the first frequency domain basis set includes one or more frequency domain bases.
可以理解的,上述下行参考信号端口可以用于发送下行参考信号。第一频域位置集合可以是由一组频域子载波索引组成的集合,每个频域子载波索引对应一个频域位置,通过该频域子载波索引可以获取对应的频域子载波上的下行参考信号或估计的信道,以计算相位差反馈量。示例性的,在接收到频域信号之后,可以在频域上抽取指定频域索引处对应的下行参考信号或估计的信道,用于计算相位差反馈量。It can be understood that the above-mentioned downlink reference signal port can be used to send a downlink reference signal. The first frequency domain position set can be a set consisting of a set of frequency domain subcarrier indices, each frequency domain subcarrier index corresponds to a frequency domain position, and the downlink reference signal or estimated channel on the corresponding frequency domain subcarrier can be obtained through the frequency domain subcarrier index to calculate the phase difference feedback amount. Exemplarily, after receiving the frequency domain signal, the downlink reference signal or estimated channel corresponding to the specified frequency domain index can be extracted in the frequency domain to calculate the phase difference feedback amount.
频域基底指的是对于一个频域带宽内的多个频域位置,将上述频域位置的参考信号矢量或信道矢量乘以一个特定的变换矩阵,得到一个变换域下的参考信号矢量或变换域下的信道矢量,变换矩阵的每一列称为一个频域基底,示例性的,该变换矩阵可以是离散傅里叶变换(discrete fourier transform,DFT)矩阵。对应的,频域基底集合可以包含变换矩阵的一个或多个列。示例性的,在基于该频域基底集合进行相关计算时,可以先将频域位置的参考信号矢量或信道矢量与所选取变换矩阵的一个或多个列相乘,得到变换域下的参考信号矢量或变换域下的信道矢量,再基于该变换域下的参考信号矢量或信道矢量进行相关计算。The frequency domain basis refers to that for multiple frequency domain positions within a frequency domain bandwidth, the reference signal vector or channel vector of the above frequency domain position is multiplied by a specific transformation matrix to obtain a reference signal vector in a transform domain or a channel vector in a transform domain. Each column of the transformation matrix is called a frequency domain basis. Exemplarily, the transformation matrix can be a discrete Fourier transform (DFT) matrix. Correspondingly, the frequency domain basis set can include one or more columns of the transformation matrix. Exemplarily, when performing correlation calculations based on the frequency domain basis set, the reference signal vector or channel vector of the frequency domain position can be first multiplied by one or more columns of the selected transformation matrix to obtain a reference signal vector in a transform domain or a channel vector in a transform domain, and then the correlation calculation is performed based on the reference signal vector or channel vector in the transform domain.
示例性的,在一个第一端口集合对应多个相位差反馈量时,每个相位差反馈量对应的第二端口集合可以是不同的,对应的第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合也可以是不同的。Exemplarily, when a first port set corresponds to multiple phase difference feedback amounts, the second port set corresponding to each phase difference feedback amount may be different, and the corresponding first frequency domain position set or first frequency domain basis set may also be different.
结合第一方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述多个相位差反馈量中的任意两个所述相位差反馈量满足如下至少一项:所述任意两个所述相位差反馈量对应的所述第一端口集合不同;所述任意两个所述相位差反馈量对应的第二端口集合不同;所述任意两个所述相位差反馈量对应的第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合不同。In combination with the first aspect, in an optional implementation, any two of the multiple phase difference feedback amounts satisfy at least one of the following: the first port sets corresponding to the any two phase difference feedback amounts are different; the second port sets corresponding to the any two phase difference feedback amounts are different; the first frequency domain position sets or first frequency domain basis sets corresponding to the any two phase difference feedback amounts are different.
可以理解的,若指定第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合/第一频域基底集合,则可以唯一确定一个相位差反馈量。相应的,若两个相位差反馈量对应的第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合/第一频域基底集合中有任意一项或多项不同,则该两个相位差反馈量是不相同的。示例性的,上述反馈信息所指示的多个相位差反馈量可以是各不相同的(即对同一信道来说,只反馈一个相位差反馈量),以减少重复反馈带来的额外开销。It can be understood that if the first port set, the second port set and the first frequency domain position set/first frequency domain basis set are specified, a phase difference feedback amount can be uniquely determined. Accordingly, if any one or more of the first port set, the second port set and the first frequency domain position set/first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the two phase difference feedback amounts are different, the two phase difference feedback amounts are different. Exemplarily, the multiple phase difference feedback amounts indicated by the above feedback information can be different (i.e., for the same channel, only one phase difference feedback amount is fed back) to reduce the additional overhead caused by repeated feedback.
结合第一方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一时刻的下行参考信号对应的发送天线端口集合包含第二端口集合,所述第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的发送天线端口集合包含所述第二端口集合;所述第一时刻的下行参考信号对应的频域带宽包含第一频域位置集合对应的带宽或第一频域基底集合对应的带宽,所述第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的频域带宽包含所述第一频域位置集合对应的带宽或所述第一频域基底集合对应的带宽;所述第三时刻的SRS对应的发送天线端口集合包含所述第一端口集合,所述第四时刻的SRS对应的发送天线端口集合包含所述第一端口集合;所述第三时刻的SRS对应的频域带宽包含所述第一频域位置集合对应的带宽或所述第一频域基底集合对应的带宽,所述第四时刻的SRS对应的频域带宽包含所述第一频域位置集合对应的带宽或所述第一频域基底集合对应的带宽。In combination with the first aspect, in an optional implementation, the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment includes the second port set, and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment includes the second port set; the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set, and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set; the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the third moment includes the first port set, and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment includes the first port set; the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the third moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set, and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set.
在本实施例中,应当理解,第一时刻的下行参考信号对应的发送天线端口集合与第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的发送天线端口集合可以是相同的,也可以是不同的。第一时刻的下行参考信号对应的频域带宽与第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的频域带宽可以是相同的,也可以是不同的。第三时刻的SRS对应的发送天线端口集合与第四时刻的SRS对应的发送天线端口集合可以是相同的,也可以是不同的。第三时刻的SRS对应的频域带宽与第四时刻的SRS对应的频域带宽可以是相同的,也可以是不同的。在此不作限定。In this embodiment, it should be understood that the set of transmitting antenna ports corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the set of transmitting antenna ports corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment may be the same or different. The frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment may be the same or different. The set of transmitting antenna ports corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the set of transmitting antenna ports corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment may be the same or different. The frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment may be the same or different. No limitation is made here.
可以理解的,为了使第二端口集合、第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合对应的下行参考信号能够被接收到,在不同时刻(第一时刻和第二时刻),下行参考信号对应的发送天线端口集合均需要包含上述第二端口集合,并且对应的频域带宽均需要包含第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合对应的带宽。同样的,为了使第一端口集合、第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合对应的SRS能够被接收到,在不同时刻(第三时刻和第四时刻),SRS对应的发送天线端口集合均需要包含上述第一端口集合,并且对应的频域带宽均需要包含第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合对应的带宽。It can be understood that in order for the downlink reference signal corresponding to the second port set, the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set to be received, at different times (the first time and the second time), the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal needs to include the above-mentioned second port set, and the corresponding frequency domain bandwidth needs to include the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set. Similarly, in order for the SRS corresponding to the first port set, the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set to be received, at different times (the third time and the fourth time), the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS needs to include the above-mentioned first port set, and the corresponding frequency domain bandwidth needs to include the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set.
结合第一方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:接收第一指示信息;或者,发送所述第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息用于指示所述相位差反馈量对应的所述第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合中的任意一项或多项。In combination with the first aspect, in an optional embodiment, the method also includes: receiving first indication information; or, sending the first indication information; the first indication information is used to indicate any one or more of the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount.
示例性的,按照第一指示信息的指示进行信号(如下行参考信号、估计的信道、SRS)的收发,有助于实现准确地接收/发送的信号。按照第一指示信息的指示进行相位差反馈量的计算,有助于实现准确的计算所述相位差反馈量。 Exemplarily, transmitting and receiving a signal (such as a downlink reference signal, an estimated channel, or an SRS) according to the first indication information helps to accurately receive/send the signal. Calculating a phase difference feedback amount according to the first indication information helps to accurately calculate the phase difference feedback amount.
可选的,在第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及频域位置集合或频域基底集合之间的任意两项或两项以上建立有关联关系的情况下,第一指示信息也可以指示其中建立有关联关系的任意一项及以上,以及未与其它项建立关联关系的部分项。对应的,该第一指示信息的接收方可基于该关联关系获知剩余未被指示的部分项,以减少第一指示信息的信息量,降低发送该第一指示信息的开销。Optionally, when any two or more of the first port set, the second port set, and the frequency domain position set or the frequency domain basis set have an associated relationship, the first indication information may also indicate any one or more of the items with an associated relationship, as well as some items that have not established an associated relationship with other items. Correspondingly, the recipient of the first indication information may learn the remaining unindicated items based on the associated relationship, so as to reduce the amount of information in the first indication information and reduce the overhead of sending the first indication information.
结合第一方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:基于SRS端口信息,确定所述第一端口集合;所述SRS端口信息为所述第三时刻的SRS对应的发送天线端口集合和所述第四时刻的SRS对应的发送天线端口集合的信息。In combination with the first aspect, in an optional implementation, the method further includes: determining the first port set based on SRS port information; the SRS port information is information of the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment.
示例性的,通过配置SRS资源时对应的SRS端口信息,确定每个相位差反馈量对应的第一端口集合,可以简化SRS接收方和发送方之间关于第一端口集合的交互流程。Exemplarily, by configuring the corresponding SRS port information when configuring SRS resources, the first port set corresponding to each phase difference feedback amount is determined, which can simplify the interaction process between the SRS receiver and sender regarding the first port set.
结合第一方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:基于下行参考信号端口信息,确定所述第二端口集合;所述下行参考信号端口信息为所述第一时刻的下行参考信号对应的发送天线端口集合和所述第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的发送天线端口集合的信息;基于第二频域位置集合和第三频域位置集合,确定所述第一频域位置集合;所述第二频域位置集合为所述第三时刻和所述第四时刻的SRS对应的一个或多个频域位置,所述第三频域位置集合为所述第一时刻和所述第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的一个或多个频域位置;或者,基于第二频域基底集合和第三频域基底集合,确定所述第一频域基底集合;所述第二频域基底集合为所述第三时刻和所述第四时刻的SRS对应的一个或多个频域基底,所述第三频域基底集合为所述第一时刻和所述第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的一个或多个频域基底。In combination with the first aspect, in an optional implementation, the method further includes: determining the second port set based on downlink reference signal port information; the downlink reference signal port information is information of the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment; determining the first frequency domain position set based on the second frequency domain position set and the third frequency domain position set; the second frequency domain position set is one or more frequency domain positions corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment, and the third frequency domain position set is one or more frequency domain positions corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the second moment; or, determining the first frequency domain basis set based on the second frequency domain basis set and the third frequency domain basis set; the second frequency domain basis set is one or more frequency domain basis corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment, and the third frequency domain basis set is one or more frequency domain basis corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the second moment.
示例性的,通过配置下行参考信号资源时对应的下行参考信号端口信息确定每个相位差反馈量对应的第二端口集合,以及配置SRS资源和下行参考信号资源时对应的频域位置集合(第二频域位置集合和第三频域位置集合)或频域基底集合(第二频域基底集合和第三频域基底集合),确定每个相位差反馈量对应的第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合,可以简化下行参考信号的接收方和发送方之间关于第二端口集合、第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合的交互流程。Exemplarily, by determining the second port set corresponding to each phase difference feedback amount through the downlink reference signal port information corresponding to the configuration of the downlink reference signal resources, and the frequency domain position set (the second frequency domain position set and the third frequency domain position set) or the frequency domain basis set (the second frequency domain basis set and the third frequency domain basis set) corresponding to the configuration of the SRS resources and the downlink reference signal resources, the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to each phase difference feedback amount is determined, and the interaction process between the receiver and the sender of the downlink reference signal regarding the second port set, the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set can be simplified.
结合第一方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,在所述第一端口集合包含多个天线端口的情况下,所述第一端口集合中的任意两个天线端口具有相干能力;在第二端口集合包含多个下行参考信号端口的情况下,所述第二端口集合中的任意两个下行参考信号端口具有相干能力。In combination with the first aspect, in an optional embodiment, when the first port set includes multiple antenna ports, any two antenna ports in the first port set have coherence capability; when the second port set includes multiple downlink reference signal ports, any two downlink reference signal ports in the second port set have coherence capability.
示例性的,上述至少一个第一端口集合可以是基于终端设备各个天线端口之间的相干能力划分的,其中,每个第一端口集合中的任意两个天线端口之间是相干的,即在每个第一端口集合中任意两个天线端口在同一时刻发送/接收信号时,该任意两个天线端口对应的发射/接收链路对信号的幅度和相位的影响是一致的。同样的,第二端口集合中的任意两个下行参考信号端口之间是相干的,其中每个下行参考信号端口可以对应至少一个天线端口,示例性的,对于第二端口集合中的任意两个下行参考信号端口,若其中一个下行参考信号端口所对应的天线端口中有至少一个天线端口与另一个下行参考信号端口所对应的至少一个天线端口之间是相干的,则可表示上述任意两个下行参考信号端口具有相干能力。在本实施例中,基于相干能力划分端口集合,以便于实现对多个天线端口共享同一个相位差反馈量,节约计算和反馈相位差反馈量的开销。Exemplarily, the at least one first port set may be divided based on the coherence capability between the antenna ports of the terminal device, wherein any two antenna ports in each first port set are coherent, that is, when any two antenna ports in each first port set send/receive signals at the same time, the transmit/receive links corresponding to the any two antenna ports have the same influence on the amplitude and phase of the signal. Similarly, any two downlink reference signal ports in the second port set are coherent, wherein each downlink reference signal port may correspond to at least one antenna port. Exemplarily, for any two downlink reference signal ports in the second port set, if at least one antenna port corresponding to one of the downlink reference signal ports is coherent with at least one antenna port corresponding to the other downlink reference signal port, it can be indicated that the above-mentioned any two downlink reference signal ports have coherence capability. In this embodiment, the port set is divided based on the coherence capability so as to realize sharing of the same phase difference feedback amount for multiple antenna ports, thereby saving the overhead of calculating and feeding back the phase difference feedback amount.
结合第一方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述下行参考信号包括信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information-reference signal,CSI-RS)、跟踪参考信号(tracking reference signal,TRS)、相位跟踪参考信号(phase tracking-reference signal,PT-RS)以及解调参考信号(demodulation-reference signal,DM-RS)中的任意一项。In combination with the first aspect, in an optional implementation, the downlink reference signal includes any one of a channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS), a tracking reference signal (TRS), a phase tracking reference signal (PT-RS) and a demodulation reference signal (DM-RS).
第二方面,本申请实施例公开了一种通信方法,所述方法包括:基于至少一个第二端口集合,分别在第一时刻和第二时刻发送下行参考信号;所述第二端口集合包含一个或多个下行参考信号端口;接收反馈信息,所述反馈信息用于指示多个相位差反馈量;每个所述相位差反馈量用于指示其对应的第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息;所述第一端口集合包含一个或多个天线端口;每个所述相位差反馈量对应所述至少一个第一端口集合中的一个。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application discloses a communication method, the method comprising: sending a downlink reference signal at a first moment and a second moment respectively based on at least one second port set; the second port set includes one or more downlink reference signal ports; receiving feedback information, the feedback information being used to indicate multiple phase difference feedback amounts; each of the phase difference feedback amounts being used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port in the corresponding first port set at the first moment and the second moment; the first port set includes one or more antenna ports; each of the phase difference feedback amounts corresponds to one of the at least one first port set.
结合第二方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述每个所述相位差反馈量用于指示其对应的第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息包括如下至少一项:所述相位差反馈量用于指示其对应的所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息;所述下行参考信号之间的相位差信息是所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号的互相关的相位信息;所述相位差反馈量用于指示其对应的所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻的信道之间的相位差信息; 所述信道之间的相位差信息是所述第一时刻的信道与所述第二时刻的信道的互相关的相位信息;所述第一时刻的信道是基于所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻接收的下行参考信号确定的,所述第二时刻的信道是基于所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号确定的。In combination with the second aspect, in an optional implementation, each of the phase difference feedback amounts is used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the corresponding antenna port in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment, including at least one of the following: the phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the corresponding antenna port in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment; the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals is the cross-correlation phase information of the downlink reference signals received by the antenna port in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment; the phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the channels of the corresponding antenna port in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment; The phase difference information between the channels is the phase information of the mutual correlation between the channel at the first moment and the channel at the second moment; the channel at the first moment is determined based on the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port in the first port set at the first moment, and the channel at the second moment is determined based on the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port in the first port set at the second moment.
结合第二方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:在第三时刻和第四时刻接收SRS;所述第一时刻与所述第三时刻的时间间隔为第一时间差,所述第二时刻与所述第四时刻的时间间隔为第二时间差;所述相位差反馈量对应一个所述第三时刻和一个所述第四时刻。In combination with the second aspect, in an optional implementation, the method further includes: receiving SRS at a third moment and a fourth moment; the time interval between the first moment and the third moment is a first time difference, and the time interval between the second moment and the fourth moment is a second time difference; the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to one third moment and one fourth moment.
结合第二方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一时间差小于第一阈值,所述第二时间差小于所述第一阈值;或者,所述第一时间差小于或等于所述第一阈值,所述第二时间差小于或等于所述第一阈值。In combination with the second aspect, in an optional implementation, the first time difference is less than a first threshold, and the second time difference is less than the first threshold; or, the first time difference is less than or equal to the first threshold, and the second time difference is less than or equal to the first threshold.
结合第二方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一阈值满足如下任意一项:所述第一阈值等于第三时间差的四分之一,所述第三时间差为所述第三时刻与所述第四时刻的时间间隔;所述第一阈值等于所述第三时间差的五分之一;所述第一阈值等于所述第三时间差的八分之一;所述第一阈值等于5个时隙的时间;所述第一阈值等于2个时隙的时间;所述第一阈值等于1个时隙的时间。In combination with the second aspect, in an optional embodiment, the first threshold satisfies any one of the following: the first threshold is equal to one quarter of the third time difference, and the third time difference is the time interval between the third moment and the fourth moment; the first threshold is equal to one fifth of the third time difference; the first threshold is equal to one eighth of the third time difference; the first threshold is equal to 5 time slots; the first threshold is equal to 2 time slots; the first threshold is equal to 1 time slot.
结合第二方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述相位差反馈量用于补偿在所述第三时刻接收的SRS对应的随机相位与在所述第四时刻接收的SRS对应的随机相位之间的差。In combination with the second aspect, in an optional implementation, the phase difference feedback amount is used to compensate for a difference between a random phase corresponding to the SRS received at the third moment and a random phase corresponding to the SRS received at the fourth moment.
结合第二方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述相位差反馈量对应所述至少一个第二端口集合中的一个第二端口集合;所述相位差反馈量对应一个第一频域位置集合或对应一个第一频域基底集合;所述第一频域位置集合包括一个或多个频域位置,所述第一频域基底集合包括一个或多个频域基底。In combination with the second aspect, in an optional embodiment, the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to a second port set in the at least one second port set; the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to a first frequency domain position set or corresponds to a first frequency domain basis set; the first frequency domain position set includes one or more frequency domain positions, and the first frequency domain basis set includes one or more frequency domain bases.
结合第二方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述多个相位差反馈量中的任意两个所述相位差反馈量满足如下至少一项:所述任意两个所述相位差反馈量对应的所述第一端口集合不同;所述任意两个所述相位差反馈量对应的所述第二端口集合不同;所述任意两个所述相位差反馈量对应的第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合不同。In combination with the second aspect, in an optional implementation, any two of the multiple phase difference feedback amounts satisfy at least one of the following: the first port sets corresponding to the any two phase difference feedback amounts are different; the second port sets corresponding to the any two phase difference feedback amounts are different; the first frequency domain position sets or first frequency domain basis sets corresponding to the any two phase difference feedback amounts are different.
结合第二方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一时刻的下行参考信号对应的发送天线端口集合包含所述第二端口集合,所述第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的发送天线端口集合包含所述第二端口集合;所述第一时刻的下行参考信号对应的频域带宽包含第一频域位置集合对应的带宽或第一频域基底集合对应的带宽,所述第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的频域带宽包含所述第一频域位置集合对应的带宽或所述第一频域基底集合对应的带宽;所述第三时刻的SRS对应的发送天线端口集合包含所述第一端口集合,所述第四时刻的SRS对应的发送天线端口集合包含所述第一端口集合;所述第三时刻的SRS对应的频域带宽包含所述第一频域位置集合对应的带宽或所述第一频域基底集合对应的带宽,所述第四时刻的SRS对应的频域带宽包含所述第一频域位置集合对应的带宽或所述第一频域基底集合对应的带宽。In combination with the second aspect, in an optional implementation, the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment includes the second port set, and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment includes the second port set; the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set, and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set; the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the third moment includes the first port set, and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment includes the first port set; the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the third moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set, and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set.
结合第二方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法包括:发送第一指示信息,或者,接收所述第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息用于指示所述相位差反馈量对应的所述第一端口集合、所述第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合中的任意一项或多项。In combination with the second aspect, in an optional embodiment, the method includes: sending first indication information, or receiving the first indication information; the first indication information is used to indicate any one or more of the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount.
结合第二方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一端口集合是基于SRS端口信息确定的,所述SRS端口信息为所述第三时刻的SRS对应的发送天线端口集合和所述第四时刻的SRS对应的发送天线端口集合的信息。In combination with the second aspect, in an optional implementation, the first port set is determined based on SRS port information, and the SRS port information is information of a transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and a transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment.
结合第二方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第二端口集合是基于下行参考信号端口信息确定的,所述下行参考信号端口信息为所述第一时刻的下行参考信号对应的发送天线端口集合和所述第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的发送天线端口集合的信息;所述第一频域位置集合是基于第二频域位置集合和第三频域位置集合确定的,所述第二频域位置集合为所述第三时刻和所述第四时刻的SRS对应的一个或多个频域位置,所述第三频域位置集合为所述第一时刻和所述第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的一个或多个频域位置;或者,所述第一频域基底集合是基于第二频域基底集合和第三频域基底集合确定的;所述第二频域基底集合为所述第三时刻和所述第四时刻的SRS对应的一个或多个频域基底,所述第三频域基底集合为所述第一时刻和所述第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的一个或多个频域基底。In combination with the second aspect, in an optional implementation, the second port set is determined based on the downlink reference signal port information, and the downlink reference signal port information is information of the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment; the first frequency domain position set is determined based on the second frequency domain position set and the third frequency domain position set, and the second frequency domain position set is one or more frequency domain positions corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment, and the third frequency domain position set is one or more frequency domain positions corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the second moment; or, the first frequency domain basis set is determined based on the second frequency domain basis set and the third frequency domain basis set; the second frequency domain basis set is one or more frequency domain basis corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment, and the third frequency domain basis set is one or more frequency domain basis corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the second moment.
结合第二方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,在所述第一端口集合包含多个天线端口的情况下,所述第一端口集合中的任意两个天线端口具有相干能力;在所述第二端口集合包含多个下行参考信号端口的情况下,所述第二端口集合中的任意两个下行参考信号端口具有相干能力。In combination with the second aspect, in an optional embodiment, when the first port set includes multiple antenna ports, any two antenna ports in the first port set have coherence capability; when the second port set includes multiple downlink reference signal ports, any two downlink reference signal ports in the second port set have coherence capability.
结合第二方面,在一种可选的实施方式中,所述下行参考信号包括CSI-RS、TRS、PT-RS以及DM-RS中的任意一项。In combination with the second aspect, in an optional implementation, the downlink reference signal includes any one of CSI-RS, TRS, PT-RS and DM-RS.
关于第二方面及第二方面的任意一种可选的实施方式带来的技术效果,可对应参考第一方面及第一方 面的任意一种可选的实施方式的技术效果的介绍,在此不做赘述。Regarding the technical effects brought about by the second aspect and any optional implementation of the second aspect, reference may be made to the first aspect and the first aspect. The technical effects of any optional implementation scheme described above will not be elaborated here.
第三方面,本申请公开了一种通信装置,包括用于执行如第一方面或第一方面任意一种可选的实施方式中所述方法的单元;或者,用于执行如第二方面或第二方面任意一种可选的实施方式中所述方法的单元。In a third aspect, the present application discloses a communication device, comprising a unit for executing the method as described in the first aspect or any optional implementation of the first aspect; or, a unit for executing the method as described in the second aspect or any optional implementation of the second aspect.
第四方面,本申请公开了一种通信装置,所述装置包括存储器和处理器;所述存储器,用于存储程序;所述处理器,用于执行所述处理器存储的所述程序,在所述程序被所述处理器执行的情况下,所述处理器执行如第一方面或第一方面任意一种可选的实施方式中所述的方法;或者,所述处理器执行如第二方面或第二方面任意一种可选的实施方式中所述的方法。In a fourth aspect, the present application discloses a communication device, comprising a memory and a processor; the memory is used to store programs; the processor is used to execute the programs stored in the processor, and when the program is executed by the processor, the processor executes the method described in the first aspect or any optional implementation of the first aspect; or, the processor executes the method described in the second aspect or any optional implementation of the second aspect.
第五方面,本申请公开了一种通信装置,所述装置包括逻辑电路和接口,所述逻辑电路与所述接口耦合;所述接口用于输入和/或输出代码指令,所述逻辑电路用于执行所述代码指令,在所述代码指令被所述逻辑电路执行的情况下,所述逻辑电路执行如第一方面或第一方面任意一种可选的实施方式中所述的方法;或者,所述逻辑电路执行如第二方面或第二方面任意一种可选的实施方式中所述的方法。In a fifth aspect, the present application discloses a communication device, comprising a logic circuit and an interface, wherein the logic circuit is coupled to the interface; the interface is used to input and/or output code instructions, and the logic circuit is used to execute the code instructions. When the code instructions are executed by the logic circuit, the logic circuit executes the method described in the first aspect or any optional embodiment of the first aspect; or, the logic circuit executes the method described in the second aspect or any optional embodiment of the second aspect.
第六方面,本申请公开了一种计算机存储介质,所述计算机存储介质中存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序包括程序指令,在所述程序指令被处理器执行的情况下,所述处理器执行如第一方面或第一方面任意一种可选的实施方式中所述的方法;或者,所述处理器执行如第二方面或第二方面任意一种可选的实施方式中所述的方法。In a sixth aspect, the present application discloses a computer storage medium, wherein a computer program is stored in the computer storage medium, and the computer program includes program instructions. When the program instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes the method described in the first aspect or any optional embodiment of the first aspect; or, the processor executes the method described in the second aspect or any optional embodiment of the second aspect.
第七方面,本申请公开了一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或计算机代码,当所述计算机程序或所述计算机代码在计算机上运行时,使得如第一方面或第一方面任意一种可选的实施方式中所述的方法被执行;或者,使得如第二方面或第二方面任意一种可选的实施方式中所述的方法被执行。In the seventh aspect, the present application discloses a computer program product, which includes a computer program or a computer code. When the computer program or the computer code runs on a computer, the method described in the first aspect or any optional embodiment of the first aspect is executed; or, the method described in the second aspect or any optional embodiment of the second aspect is executed.
第八方面,本申请公开了一种通信系统,包括终端设备和网络设备,所述终端设备用于执行如第一方面或第一方面任意一种可选的实施方式中所述的方法,所述网络设备用于执行如第二方面或第二方面任意一种可选的实施方式中所述的方法。In an eighth aspect, the present application discloses a communication system, comprising a terminal device and a network device, wherein the terminal device is used to execute the method described in the first aspect or any optional embodiment of the first aspect, and the network device is used to execute the method described in the second aspect or any optional embodiment of the second aspect.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
以下对本申请实施例用到的附图进行介绍。The following is an introduction to the drawings used in the embodiments of the present application.
图1是本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的架构示意图;FIG1 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图2是本申请实施例提供的一种基于SRS信道估计结果的信道预测方法的场景示意图;FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a channel prediction method based on SRS channel estimation results provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3是本申请实施例提供的一种基于CSI反馈结果的信道预测方法的场景示意图;FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a channel prediction method based on CSI feedback results provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图4是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的交互示意图;FIG4 is an interactive schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的交互示意图;FIG5 is an interactive schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图6是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的场景示意图;FIG6 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图7a是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的场景示意图;FIG7a is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图7b是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的交互示意图;FIG7b is an interactive schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图8是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的场景示意图;FIG8 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图9a是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的场景示意图;FIG9a is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图9b是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的交互示意图;FIG9b is an interactive schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图10是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;FIG10 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图11是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;FIG11 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图12是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图。FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
为了使本申请的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚,下面结合本申请实施例中的附图对本申请实施例进行描述。In order to make the objectives, technical solutions and advantages of the present application clearer, the embodiments of the present application are described below in conjunction with the drawings in the embodiments of the present application.
本申请的说明书、权利要求书及附图中的术语“第一”和“第二”等是用于区别不同对象,而不是用于描述特定顺序。此外,术语“包括”和“具有”以及它们的任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含。例如包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、系统、产品或设备等,没有限定于已列出的步骤或单元,而是可选地还包括没有列出的步骤或单元等,或可选地还包括对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备等固有的其它步骤或单元。The terms "first" and "second" in the specification, claims and drawings of this application are used to distinguish different objects, rather than to describe a specific order. In addition, the terms "including" and "having" and any variations thereof are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusions. For example, a process, method, system, product or device that includes a series of steps or units is not limited to the listed steps or units, but may optionally include steps or units that are not listed, or may optionally include other steps or units that are inherent to these processes, methods, products or devices.
在本文中提及的“实施例”意味着,结合实施例描述的特定特征、结构或特性可以包含在本申请的至少 一个实施例中。在说明书中的各个位置出现该短语并不一定均是指相同的实施例,也不是与其它实施例互斥的独立的或备选的实施例。本领域技术人员可以显式地和隐式地理解的是,本文所描述的实施例可以与其它实施例相结合。The “embodiment” mentioned in this document means that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic described in conjunction with the embodiment may be included in at least one embodiment of the present application. In one embodiment. The appearance of this phrase in various places in the specification does not necessarily refer to the same embodiment, nor is it an independent or alternative embodiment that is mutually exclusive with other embodiments. It can be explicitly and implicitly understood by those skilled in the art that the embodiments described herein can be combined with other embodiments.
应当理解,在本申请中,“至少一个(项)”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上,“至少两个(项)”是指两个或三个及三个以上。“和/或”,用于描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,“A和/或B”可以表示:只存在A,只存在B以及同时存在A和B三种情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,“a和b”,“a和c”,“b和c”,或“a和b和c”,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。It should be understood that in the present application, "at least one (item)" means one or more, "more than one" means two or more, and "at least two (items)" means two or three and more than three. "And/or" is used to describe the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist. For example, "A and/or B" can mean: only A exists, only B exists, and A and B exist at the same time, where A and B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the objects associated before and after are in an "or" relationship. "At least one of the following items" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single items or plural items. For example, at least one of a, b or c can mean: a, b, c, "a and b", "a and c", "b and c", or "a and b and c", where a, b, c can be single or multiple.
图1是本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的架构示意图。如图1所示,本申请提供的通信方法可应用于移动通信系统,上述移动通信系统包括网络设备101和终端设备102。示例性的,终端设备102可基于接收到的下行参考信号,计算并向网络设备101反馈相位差反馈量,以便于网络设备101补偿终端设备102发送SRS时产生的SRS随机相位的差。FIG1 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG1, the communication method provided by the present application can be applied to a mobile communication system, and the mobile communication system includes a network device 101 and a terminal device 102. Exemplarily, the terminal device 102 can calculate and feed back a phase difference feedback amount to the network device 101 based on the received downlink reference signal, so that the network device 101 compensates for the difference in the random phase of the SRS generated when the terminal device 102 sends the SRS.
示例性的,上述移动通信系统可以是5G移动通信系统,还可以是未来通信发展中新的通信系统,如第六代(6th-generation,6G)移动通信系统。进一步的,上述方法还可以应用于移动无线通信场景中,例如,上述移动通信系统可以是蜂窝移动无线通信系统,还可以是无线局域网(wireless local area network,WLAN)系统,如移动无线保真(wireless fidelity,WI-FI)。可以理解的,以上通信系统可以应用于低频场景(sub 6G),还可以应用于高频场景(6G以上)。Exemplarily, the above mobile communication system may be a 5G mobile communication system, or a new communication system in future communication development, such as a sixth-generation (6G) mobile communication system. Furthermore, the above method may also be applied to mobile wireless communication scenarios. For example, the above mobile communication system may be a cellular mobile wireless communication system, or a wireless local area network (WLAN) system, such as mobile wireless fidelity (WI-FI). It is understandable that the above communication system may be applied to low-frequency scenarios (sub 6G) or high-frequency scenarios (above 6G).
示例性的,如图1所示的网络设备101可以是接入网设备。其中,接入网设备是指有提供网络接入功能的设备,如无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)基站。示例性的,网络设备101可以是演进型基站(evolved node B,eNB)、下一代基站(the next Generation Node B,gNB)、家庭基站(home node B,HNB),还可以是未来移动通信系统中的基站。可理解的,网络设备101可以包括基站(base station,BS),也可以包括基站以及用于控制基站的无线资源管理设备等。示例性的,如图1所示的终端设备102可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(pad)、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端、无人驾驶领域的无线终端、远程医疗领域的无线终端等。Exemplarily, the network device 101 shown in FIG. 1 may be an access network device. Among them, the access network device refers to a device that provides network access functions, such as a radio access network (RAN) base station. Exemplarily, the network device 101 may be an evolved node B (eNB), the next generation Node B (gNB), a home node B (HNB), or a base station in a future mobile communication system. Understandably, the network device 101 may include a base station (BS), or a base station and a wireless resource management device for controlling the base station. Exemplarily, the terminal device 102 shown in FIG. 1 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer (pad), a virtual reality (VR) terminal, an augmented reality (AR) terminal, a wireless terminal in the field of unmanned driving, a wireless terminal in the field of telemedicine, etc.
下面将介绍现有技术中的信道预测方法。The following is an introduction to the channel prediction method in the prior art.
一般的,按照网络设备侧获取CSI方式的不同,信道预测方法主要包括基于SRS信道估计结果的信道预测方法、基于CSI反馈结果的信道预测方法两类,下面将分别介绍以上两类方法。Generally, according to the different ways of obtaining CSI on the network device side, the channel prediction methods mainly include two types: a channel prediction method based on SRS channel estimation results and a channel prediction method based on CSI feedback results. The above two types of methods will be introduced respectively below.
基于SRS信道估计结果的信道预测方法可应用于TDD mMIMO移动通信系统中,在该方法中,网络设备可以基于终端设备发送的SRS,估计出上行CSI,然后基于信道互易性(上行信道与同一时刻的下行信道相同)和多个时刻估计出的上行CSI,预测未来的特定时刻的下行信道。The channel prediction method based on SRS channel estimation results can be applied to TDD mMIMO mobile communication systems. In this method, the network equipment can estimate the uplink CSI based on the SRS sent by the terminal device, and then predict the downlink channel at a specific time in the future based on channel reciprocity (the uplink channel is the same as the downlink channel at the same time) and the uplink CSI estimated at multiple times.
下面将结合图2对上述基于SRS信道估计结果的信道预测方法进行详细说明。图2是本申请实施例提供的一种基于SRS信道估计结果的信道预测方法的场景示意图。The channel prediction method based on the SRS channel estimation result is described in detail below in conjunction with Figure 2. Figure 2 is a scenario diagram of a channel prediction method based on the SRS channel estimation result provided by an embodiment of the present application.
基于图2,上述方法可以包括如下步骤:Based on FIG. 2 , the above method may include the following steps:
S201:网络设备发送SRS指示信息。对应的,终端设备接收该SRS指示信息。S201: The network device sends SRS indication information, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the SRS indication information.
该SRS指示信息用于指示终端设备侧配置的SRS资源,终端设备可按照该SRS资源指示信息进行SRS资源配置。The SRS indication information is used to indicate the SRS resources configured on the terminal device side, and the terminal device can configure the SRS resources according to the SRS resource indication information.
S202:网络设备在不同时刻接收SRS。对应的,终端设备基于接收到的SRS指示信息在不同时刻发送SRS。S202: The network device receives the SRS at different times. Correspondingly, the terminal device sends the SRS at different times based on the received SRS indication information.
如图2所示,终端设备在按照该SRS资源指示信息进行SRS资源配置之后,分别在不同时刻t1、t2至tM(M≥2)向网络设备发送SRS。对应的,网络设备接收不同时刻的SRS。As shown in Fig. 2, after configuring the SRS resource according to the SRS resource indication information, the terminal device sends the SRS to the network device at different times t1 , t2 to tM (M≥2). Correspondingly, the network device receives the SRS at different times.
S203:网络设备基于在不同时刻接收到的SRS,对上行信道进行信道估计,得到每个时刻对应的CSI估计结果。S203: The network device performs channel estimation on the uplink channel based on the SRS received at different times, and obtains a CSI estimation result corresponding to each time.
网络设备可通过特定的信道估计算法,基于在不同时刻接收到的SRS,分别对不同时刻t1、t2至tM对应的SRS信道(上行信道)进行信道估计,可分别得到每个时刻对应的上行CSI估计结果 The network device can use a specific channel estimation algorithm to perform channel estimation on the SRS channels (uplink channels) corresponding to different times t 1 , t 2 to t M based on the SRS received at different times, and can obtain the uplink CSI estimation results corresponding to each time.
S204:终端设备基于不同时刻对应的CSI估计结果,预测未来特定时刻的下行信道。S204: The terminal device predicts the downlink channel at a specific time in the future based on the CSI estimation results corresponding to different time periods.
网络设备可基于计算信道随时间变化的规律,并基于特定的信道预测算法预测 未来下行传输时刻的CSI。进一步的,网络设备还可基于预测的未来下行传输时刻的CSI进行下行权值计算和下行数据传输。Network equipment can be based on Calculate the law of channel changes over time and predict based on a specific channel prediction algorithm CSI at the future downlink transmission time. Furthermore, the network device may also perform downlink weight calculation and downlink data transmission based on the predicted CSI at the future downlink transmission time.
可以理解的,终端设备在不同时刻发送SRS时,由于发送链路的不理想性(如射频链路的开启/关断、射频链路发送功率变化等),导致终端设备在不同时刻发送SRS时会产生一个随机相位,导致不同时刻发出的SRS之间无法保证相位的一致性。进一步的,网络设备在对上行信道进行信道估计时,受SRS随机相位的影响,每个时刻的CSI估计结果会包含一个难以消除的随机相位,该随机相位会破坏上行CSI估计结果中原有的相位信息,影响了CSI估计结果原有的随时间变化的规律,进一步影响信道预测算法的性能。It is understandable that when the terminal device sends SRS at different times, due to the non-ideal nature of the transmission link (such as the opening/closing of the RF link, changes in the transmission power of the RF link, etc.), a random phase will be generated when the terminal device sends SRS at different times, resulting in the inability to ensure phase consistency between the SRS sent at different times. Furthermore, when the network device performs channel estimation on the uplink channel, it is affected by the random phase of the SRS, and the CSI estimation result at each moment is It will contain a random phase that is difficult to eliminate. This random phase will destroy the original phase information in the uplink CSI estimation result, affect the original time-varying law of the CSI estimation result, and further affect the performance of the channel prediction algorithm.
为提高信道预测算法的性能,也可以将上述基于SRS信道估计结果的信道预测算法与终端设备反馈信道时域相关性相结合。具体的,终端设备可基于在不同时刻接收到的下行参考信号(如TRS)估计每个时刻的下行信道的CSI,进一步计算不同时刻下行信道之间的相关性(包含幅度信息和相位信息),并反馈给网络设备。对应的,网络设备基于终端设备反馈的相关性信息,计算信道预测的算法参数,以提高上述信道预测算法的性能。但可以理解的,该方法依然不能消除SRS随机相位对信道预测的影响。In order to improve the performance of the channel prediction algorithm, the above-mentioned channel prediction algorithm based on the SRS channel estimation result can also be combined with the time domain correlation of the channel fed back by the terminal device. Specifically, the terminal device can estimate the CSI of the downlink channel at each moment based on the downlink reference signal (such as TRS) received at different moments, further calculate the correlation between the downlink channels at different moments (including amplitude information and phase information), and feed it back to the network device. Correspondingly, the network device calculates the algorithm parameters of the channel prediction based on the correlation information fed back by the terminal device to improve the performance of the above-mentioned channel prediction algorithm. However, it can be understood that this method still cannot eliminate the influence of the random phase of SRS on channel prediction.
同样的,基于CSI反馈结果的信道预测方法可应用于TDD mMIMO移动通信系统中,在该方法中,终端设备可基于接收到的下行参考信号(如CSI-RS)估计下行CSI,然后按照协议的规范进行CSI量化压缩反馈,将下行CSI反馈给网络设备。对应的,网络设备可以基于终端设备反馈的下行CSI,预测未来的特定时刻的下行信道。Similarly, the channel prediction method based on CSI feedback results can be applied to TDD mMIMO mobile communication systems. In this method, the terminal device can estimate the downlink CSI based on the received downlink reference signal (such as CSI-RS), and then perform CSI quantization compression feedback according to the protocol specifications, and feed back the downlink CSI to the network device. Correspondingly, the network device can predict the downlink channel at a specific time in the future based on the downlink CSI fed back by the terminal device.
下面将结合图3对上述基于CSI反馈结果的信道预测方法进行详细说明,图3是本申请实施例提供的一种基于CSI反馈结果的信道预测方法的场景示意图。The above-mentioned channel prediction method based on CSI feedback results will be described in detail below in conjunction with Figure 3. Figure 3 is a scenario diagram of a channel prediction method based on CSI feedback results provided in an embodiment of the present application.
基于图3,上述方法包括如下步骤:Based on FIG3 , the above method includes the following steps:
S301:网络设备发送CSI-RS资源指示信息。对应的,终端设备接收该CSI-RS资源指示信息。S301: The network device sends CSI-RS resource indication information. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the CSI-RS resource indication information.
该CSI-RS资源指示信息可用于指示终端设备侧配置的CSI-RS资源,终端设备可按照该CSI-RS资源指示信息进行CSI-RS资源配置。The CSI-RS resource indication information may be used to indicate the CSI-RS resources configured on the terminal device side, and the terminal device may perform CSI-RS resource configuration according to the CSI-RS resource indication information.
S302:网络设备在不同时刻发送CSI-RS。对应的,终端设备接收该不同时刻的CSI-RS。S302: The network device sends CSI-RS at different times, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the CSI-RS at different times.
如图3所示,网络设备在不同时刻发送CSI-RS,然后终端设备按照网络设备的指示分别在t1、t2至tM(M≥2)接收网络设备发送的CSI-RS。As shown in FIG3 , the network device sends CSI-RS at different times, and then the terminal device receives the CSI-RS sent by the network device at t 1 , t 2 to t M (M≥2) respectively according to the instruction of the network device.
S303:终端设备基于在不同时刻接收到的CSI-RS,对下行信道进行信道估计,得到每个时刻对应的下行CSI估计结果。S303: The terminal device performs channel estimation on the downlink channel based on the CSI-RS received at different times, and obtains the downlink CSI estimation result corresponding to each time.
如图3所示,网络设备可通过特定的信道估计算法,基于在不同时刻接收到的CSI-RS,分别对t1、t2至tM对应的CSI-RS信道(下行信道)进行信道估计,可分别得到每个时刻对应的下行CSI估计结果 As shown in FIG3 , the network device can use a specific channel estimation algorithm to perform channel estimation on the CSI-RS channels (downlink channels) corresponding to t 1 , t 2 to t M based on the CSI-RS received at different times, and can obtain the downlink CSI estimation results corresponding to each time.
S304:终端设备向网络设备反馈不同时刻对应的下行CSI估计结果。对应的,网络设备可基于该不同时刻的下行CSI估计结果,预测未来特定时刻的下行信道。S304: The terminal device feeds back the downlink CSI estimation results corresponding to different time periods to the network device. Correspondingly, the network device can predict the downlink channel at a specific time period in the future based on the downlink CSI estimation results at different time periods.
终端设备在得到每个时刻的下行CSI估计结果之后,可以按照通信协议的规范对CSI进行量化压缩反馈,以将下行CSI估计结果反馈给网络设备。然后网络设备可基于不同时刻的CSI反馈结果(终端设备反馈的下行CSI估计结果),计算信道随时间变化的规律,并基于特定的信道预测算法预测未来特定时刻的下行信道。进一步的,网络设备还可基于特定时刻的下行信道的预测结果进行下行权值计算和下行数据传输。After obtaining the downlink CSI estimation result at each moment, the terminal device can quantize and compress the CSI according to the specification of the communication protocol to feed back the downlink CSI estimation result to the network device. Then the network device can use the CSI feedback results at different moments (the downlink CSI estimation result fed back by the terminal device) to ), calculate the law of channel changes over time, and predict the downlink channel at a specific time in the future based on a specific channel prediction algorithm. Furthermore, the network device can also perform downlink weight calculation and downlink data transmission based on the prediction result of the downlink channel at a specific time.
可以理解的,基于CSI反馈结果的信道预测依赖于终端设备测量和反馈完整的CSI(下行CSI估计结果),CSI-RS开销和CSI反馈开销大,影响下行和上行的传输速率,并且对CSI进行压缩反馈会导致量化损失,使得反馈的CSI的精度较低,从而影响信道预测的精度。It can be understood that channel prediction based on CSI feedback results relies on the terminal device to measure and feedback complete CSI (downlink CSI estimation results). The CSI-RS overhead and CSI feedback overhead are large, which affects the downlink and uplink transmission rates. In addition, compressed feedback of CSI will cause quantization loss, making the feedback CSI less accurate, thereby affecting the accuracy of channel prediction.
针对以上方法存在的问题,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法及相关产品,可以反馈上行信道对应的随机相位差的信息,提高信道预测的准确性。In response to the problems existing in the above methods, the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and related products, which can feedback the information of the random phase difference corresponding to the uplink channel to improve the accuracy of channel prediction.
下面将结合图4对上述通信方法进行详细说明,图4是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的交互示意图。The above communication method will be described in detail below in conjunction with Figure 4, which is an interactive schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
如图4所示,上述通信方法可以包括如下步骤:As shown in FIG4 , the above communication method may include the following steps:
S401:第一通信装置基于至少一个第一端口集合,分别在第一时刻和第二时刻接收下行参考信号,上 述第一端口集合包括一个或多个天线端口。S401: A first communication device receives a downlink reference signal at a first time and a second time based on at least one first port set, The first port set includes one or more antenna ports.
在本申请中,天线端口可以是实体的物理天线端口,也可以是虚拟的逻辑天线端口。下行参考信号包括但不限于CSI-RS、TRS、PT-RS以及DM-RS中的任意一项。In the present application, the antenna port may be an entity physical antenna port or a virtual logical antenna port. The downlink reference signal includes but is not limited to any one of CSI-RS, TRS, PT-RS and DM-RS.
示例性的,终端设备可以基于各个天线端口之间的相干能力,将各个天线端口划分为至少一个第一端口集合。其中,每个第一端口集合中的任意两个天线端口之间是相干的,即在每个第一端口集合中任意两个天线端口在同一时刻发送/接收信号时,该任意两个天线端口对应的发射/接收链路对信号的幅度和相位的影响是一致的。Exemplarily, the terminal device may divide each antenna port into at least one first port set based on the coherence capability between each antenna port. Any two antenna ports in each first port set are coherent, that is, when any two antenna ports in each first port set send/receive signals at the same time, the transmit/receive links corresponding to the any two antenna ports have the same influence on the amplitude and phase of the signal.
S402:第一通信装置发送反馈信息,上述反馈信息用于指示多个相位差反馈量。S402: The first communication device sends feedback information, where the feedback information is used to indicate a plurality of phase difference feedback amounts.
每个所述相位差反馈量对应所述至少一个第一端口集合中的一个;上述相位差反馈量用于指示其对应的上述第一端口集合中的天线端口在上述第一时刻与上述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息。Each of the phase difference feedback amounts corresponds to one of the at least one first port set; the phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the corresponding antenna port in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment.
可以理解的,若终端设备包含一个第一端口集合,则上述反馈信息指示的多个相位差反馈量可对应上述第一端口集合,若该终端设备包含两个或两个以上第一端口集合,则每个相位差反馈量对应上述两个或两个以上第一端口集合中的一个第一端口集合。示例性的,对一个第一端口集合来说,若该第一端口集合中的天线端口支持在同一时刻接收不同频段的下行参考信号,则该第一端口集合中的天线端口在同一时刻可以接收多个不同的下行参考信号,对应的,该第一端口集合中的天线端口在第一时刻和第二时刻接收到的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息可以是不同的,进一步的,可以由多个相位差反馈量指示不同时刻多个频段下的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息,即在上述反馈信息所指示的上述多个相位差反馈量中,可以有两个或两个以上相位差反馈量对应同一第一端口集合。应当理解,该多个相位差反馈量所指示的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息可以是各不相同的。It can be understood that if the terminal device includes a first port set, the multiple phase difference feedback amounts indicated by the feedback information may correspond to the first port set. If the terminal device includes two or more first port sets, each phase difference feedback amount corresponds to one of the two or more first port sets. Exemplarily, for a first port set, if the antenna ports in the first port set support receiving downlink reference signals of different frequency bands at the same time, the antenna ports in the first port set can receive multiple different downlink reference signals at the same time. Correspondingly, the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first time and the second time may be different. Further, the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals in multiple frequency bands at different times may be indicated by multiple phase difference feedback amounts, that is, among the multiple phase difference feedback amounts indicated by the feedback information, two or more phase difference feedback amounts may correspond to the same first port set. It should be understood that the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals indicated by the multiple phase difference feedback amounts may be different.
可选的,若终端设备仅包含一个第一端口集合,则该第一端口集合也可对应一个相位差反馈量,对应的,上述反馈信息可以用于指示该相位差反馈量。示例性的,该第一端口集合包含一个天线端口,或包含具有相干能力的多个天线端口,若第一端口集合中的每个天线端口对应的信道具有相同或相近的随时间变化的规律,则每个天线端口在不同时刻(如第一时刻和第二时刻)对应的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息也是相同或相近的,因此第一通信装置所发送的反馈信息可以仅包含一个相位差反馈量,以指示上述相同或相近的相位差信息,对应的,每个第一天线端口集合中的天线端口共享同一个相位差反馈量,节约计算和反馈相位差反馈量的开销。Optionally, if the terminal device includes only one first port set, the first port set may also correspond to one phase difference feedback amount, and correspondingly, the above feedback information may be used to indicate the phase difference feedback amount. Exemplarily, the first port set includes one antenna port, or includes multiple antenna ports with coherence capability. If the channel corresponding to each antenna port in the first port set has the same or similar time-varying law, then the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals corresponding to each antenna port at different times (such as the first time and the second time) is also the same or similar. Therefore, the feedback information sent by the first communication device may include only one phase difference feedback amount to indicate the above-mentioned same or similar phase difference information. Correspondingly, the antenna ports in each first antenna port set share the same phase difference feedback amount, saving the overhead of calculating and feeding back the phase difference feedback amount.
一般的,对上行信道估计结果来说,其相位信息中不仅包含因发射机(如上述终端设备的天线端口)硬件原因产生的随机相位的信息,还包含因信道本身随时间变化导致的相位变化。而在本申请中,由于下行参考信号一般不包含因发射机硬件原因产生的随机相位,上述相位差反馈量所指示的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息,可以反映出第一端口集合中的天线端口所对应的下行信道本身在第一时刻和第二时刻之间发生的变化,因此在将同一时刻的上行信道和下行信道视为相同的信道的情况下(如上行信道和下行信道满足互易性时),下行信道本身在第三时刻和第四时刻之间发生的变化可以等效于上行信道本身在该第一时刻和该第二时刻之间发生的变化。进一步的,有助于网络设备基于上述相位差反馈量,可以排除上行信道估计结果中因上行信道本身随时间变化导致的相位变化,继而可以确定上述随机相位的信息,有助于提高信道预测的准确度。Generally, for the uplink channel estimation result, its phase information not only includes the random phase information generated by the hardware of the transmitter (such as the antenna port of the above-mentioned terminal device), but also includes the phase change caused by the change of the channel itself over time. In the present application, since the downlink reference signal generally does not include the random phase generated by the hardware of the transmitter, the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals indicated by the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount can reflect the change of the downlink channel itself corresponding to the antenna port in the first port set between the first moment and the second moment. Therefore, when the uplink channel and the downlink channel at the same moment are regarded as the same channel (such as when the uplink channel and the downlink channel meet reciprocity), the change of the downlink channel itself between the third moment and the fourth moment can be equivalent to the change of the uplink channel itself between the first moment and the second moment. Further, it is helpful for the network device to exclude the phase change caused by the change of the uplink channel itself over time in the uplink channel estimation result based on the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount, and then the above-mentioned random phase information can be determined, which helps to improve the accuracy of channel prediction.
关于上述相位差反馈量的计算公式,将在下文进行介绍,在此先不展开说明。The calculation formula for the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount will be introduced below and will not be elaborated here.
可以理解的,相较于反馈不同时刻的下行CSI或下行CSI的相关性信息(包括幅度信息和相位信息),本申请反馈的是不同时刻下行参考信号对应的相位差信息,反馈开销较低。It can be understood that, compared with feeding back downlink CSI at different times or correlation information of downlink CSI (including amplitude information and phase information), the present application feeds back phase difference information corresponding to downlink reference signals at different times, and the feedback overhead is lower.
在一些可能的实施例中,每个相位差反馈量还可以对应一个第二端口集合,该第二端口集合包含一个或多个下行参考信号端口,该下行参考信号端口用于发送下行参考信号。同样的,该下行参考信号端口可以是实体的物理天线端口,也可以是虚拟的逻辑天线端口。In some possible embodiments, each phase difference feedback amount may also correspond to a second port set, the second port set including one or more downlink reference signal ports, the downlink reference signal port being used to send a downlink reference signal. Similarly, the downlink reference signal port may be an entity physical antenna port or a virtual logical antenna port.
可选的,每个相位差反馈量还可以对应一个第一频域位置集合或对应一个第一频域基底集合,其中,第一频域位置集合包含一个或多个频域位置,第一频域基底集合包含一个或多个频域基底。Optionally, each phase difference feedback amount may also correspond to a first frequency domain position set or a first frequency domain basis set, wherein the first frequency domain position set includes one or more frequency domain positions, and the first frequency domain basis set includes one or more frequency domain basis.
示例性的,频域位置集合可以是由一组频域子载波索引组成的集合,每个频域子载波索引对应一个频域位置,第一通信装置通过该频域子载波索引可以获取对应的频域子载波上的下行参考信号或估计的信道,以计算相位差反馈量。示例性的,第一通信装置在接收到频域信号之后,在频域上抽取指定频域索引处对应的下行参考信号或估计的信道,用于计算相位差反馈量。Exemplarily, the frequency domain position set may be a set consisting of a set of frequency domain subcarrier indices, each frequency domain subcarrier index corresponds to a frequency domain position, and the first communication device may obtain a downlink reference signal or an estimated channel on the corresponding frequency domain subcarrier through the frequency domain subcarrier index to calculate the phase difference feedback amount. Exemplarily, after receiving the frequency domain signal, the first communication device extracts the downlink reference signal or the estimated channel corresponding to the specified frequency domain index in the frequency domain for calculating the phase difference feedback amount.
频域基底指的是对于一个频域带宽内的多个频域位置,将上述频域位置的参考信号矢量或信道矢量乘 以一个特定的变换矩阵,得到一个变换域下的参考信号矢量或变换域下的信道矢量,变换矩阵的每一列称为一个频域基底,示例性的,该变换矩阵可以是DFT矩阵。对应的,频域基底集合可以包含变换矩阵的一个或多个列。示例性的,在基于该频域基底集合进行相关计算时,可以先将频域位置的参考信号矢量或信道矢量与所选取变换矩阵的一个或多个列相乘,得到变换域下的参考信号矢量或变换域下的信道矢量,再基于该变换域下的参考信号矢量或该变换域下的信道矢量进行相关计算。The frequency domain basis refers to the multiplication of the reference signal vector or channel vector of the above frequency domain positions within a frequency domain bandwidth. With a specific transformation matrix, a reference signal vector in a transform domain or a channel vector in a transform domain is obtained. Each column of the transform matrix is called a frequency domain basis. Exemplarily, the transform matrix can be a DFT matrix. Correspondingly, the frequency domain basis set can include one or more columns of the transform matrix. Exemplarily, when performing correlation calculations based on the frequency domain basis set, the reference signal vector or channel vector at the frequency domain position can be multiplied with one or more columns of the selected transform matrix to obtain the reference signal vector in the transform domain or the channel vector in the transform domain, and then the correlation calculation is performed based on the reference signal vector in the transform domain or the channel vector in the transform domain.
示例性的,在一个第一端口集合对应多个相位差反馈量时,每个相位差反馈量对应的第二端口集合可以是不同的,对应的第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合也可以是不同的。Exemplarily, when a first port set corresponds to multiple phase difference feedback amounts, the second port set corresponding to each phase difference feedback amount may be different, and the corresponding first frequency domain position set or first frequency domain basis set may also be different.
在一些可能的实施例中,为了使第一端口集合中的天线端口能够接收到第二端口集合、第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合对应的下行参考信号,在不同时刻(第一时刻和第二时刻)下行参考信号对应的下行参考信号端口集合均需要包含上述第二端口集合,并且对应的频域带宽均需要包含第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合对应的带宽。示例性的,终端设备在按照网络设备的指示配置下行参考信号资源时,第一通信装置可以基于下行参考信号资源对应的指示信息中包含的下行参考信号端口信息,确定第二端口集合,可以使第一时刻的下行参考信号对应的下行参考信号端口包含上述第二端口集合,第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的下行参考信号端口包含上述第二端口集合。同样的,基于下行参考信号资源对应的指示信息中包含的第三频域位置集合或第三频域基底集合,确定第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合,使第一时刻的下行参考信号对应的频域带宽包含第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合对应的频域带宽,第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的频域带宽包含第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合对应的频域带宽。可以理解的,第一频域基底集合对应的频域带宽指的是第一频域基底集合在变换前对应的频域带宽,相应的,第一时刻或第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的频域带宽包含变换前的多个频域位置。In some possible embodiments, in order to enable the antenna ports in the first port set to receive the downlink reference signal corresponding to the second port set, the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set, the downlink reference signal port sets corresponding to the downlink reference signal at different times (the first time and the second time) need to include the above-mentioned second port set, and the corresponding frequency domain bandwidth needs to include the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set. Exemplarily, when the terminal device configures the downlink reference signal resources according to the instructions of the network device, the first communication device can determine the second port set based on the downlink reference signal port information included in the indication information corresponding to the downlink reference signal resources, so that the downlink reference signal port corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment includes the above-mentioned second port set, and the downlink reference signal port corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment includes the above-mentioned second port set. Similarly, based on the third frequency domain position set or the third frequency domain basis set included in the indication information corresponding to the downlink reference signal resource, the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set is determined, so that the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment includes the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set, and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment includes the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set. It can be understood that the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set refers to the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set before the transformation, and accordingly, the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment or the second moment includes multiple frequency domain positions before the transformation.
同样的,为了使第二通信装置能够接收到第一端口集合、第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合对应的SRS,在不同时刻(第三时刻和第四时刻)SRS对应的发送天线端口集合均需要包含上述第一端口集合,并且对应的频域带宽均需要包含第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合对应的频域带宽。示例性的,终端设备在按照网络设备的指示配置SRS资源时,第一通信装置可以基于SRS资源对应的指示信息中包含的SRS端口信息,确定第一端口集合,可以使第三时刻的SRS对应的发送天线端口集合包含第一端口集合,第四时刻的SRS对应的发送天线端口集合包含第一端口集合。同样的,基于SRS资源对应的指示信息中包含的第二频域位置集合或第二频域基底集合,确定第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合,使第三时刻的SRS对应的频域带宽包含频域位置集合或频域基底集合对应的频域带宽,第四时刻的SRS对应的频域带宽包含频域位置集合或频域基底集合对应的频域带宽。相应的,第三时刻或第四时刻的SRS对应的频域带宽包含变换前的多个频域位置。可选的,第一通信装置还可以基于第二频域位置集合/第二频域基底集合和第三频域位置集合/第三频域基底集合,确定第一频域位置集合/第一频域基底集合。Similarly, in order for the second communication device to receive the SRS corresponding to the first port set, the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set, the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at different times (the third time and the fourth time) needs to include the above-mentioned first port set, and the corresponding frequency domain bandwidth needs to include the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set. Exemplarily, when the terminal device configures the SRS resource according to the instruction of the network device, the first communication device can determine the first port set based on the SRS port information contained in the indication information corresponding to the SRS resource, so that the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the third moment includes the first port set, and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment includes the first port set. Similarly, based on the second frequency domain position set or the second frequency domain basis set contained in the indication information corresponding to the SRS resource, the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set is determined, so that the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the third moment includes the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the frequency domain position set or the frequency domain basis set, and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment includes the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the frequency domain position set or the frequency domain basis set. Correspondingly, the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the third moment or the fourth moment includes multiple frequency domain positions before the transformation. Optionally, the first communication device can also determine the first frequency domain position set/first frequency domain basis set based on the second frequency domain position set/second frequency domain basis set and the third frequency domain position set/third frequency domain basis set.
可以理解的,若指定第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合/第一频域基底集合,则可以唯一确定一个相位差反馈量,相应的,若两个相位差反馈量对应的第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合/第一频域基底集合中有任意一项或多项不同,则该两个相位差反馈量是不相同的。示例性的,上述反馈信息所指示的多个相位差反馈量可以是各不相同的(即对同一信道来说,只反馈一个相位差反馈量),以减少重复反馈带来的额外开销。It can be understood that if the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set/first frequency domain basis set are specified, a phase difference feedback amount can be uniquely determined. Accordingly, if any one or more of the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set/first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the two phase difference feedback amounts are different, the two phase difference feedback amounts are different. Exemplarily, the multiple phase difference feedback amounts indicated by the above feedback information can be different (that is, for the same channel, only one phase difference feedback amount is fed back) to reduce the additional overhead caused by repeated feedback.
在一些可能的实施例中,上述通信方法还可以包括:In some possible embodiments, the above communication method may further include:
S403:第一通信装置基于上述至少一个第一端口集合,在第三时刻和第四时刻发送SRS。S403: The first communication device sends an SRS at a third moment and a fourth moment based on the at least one first port set.
上述第一时刻与上述第三时刻的时间间隔为第一时间差,上述第二时刻与上述第四时刻的时间间隔为第二时间差,上述相位差反馈量对应一个上述第三时刻和一个上述第四时刻。The time interval between the first moment and the third moment is a first time difference, the time interval between the second moment and the fourth moment is a second time difference, and the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to one third moment and one fourth moment.
可以理解的,由于信道会随着时间发生变化,因此,为了满足上行信道与下行信道之间的互易性,即为了使相位差反馈量所反映的下行信道本身在第一时刻和第二时刻之间的变化可以等效于上行信道本身在该第三时刻和该第四时刻之间发生的变化,下行参考信号的发送时刻与SRS的发送时刻之间的时间间隔应当尽可能的小,即第一时间差和第二时间差应当尽可能的小,因此本实施例通过设置时间上限(第一阈值)的方式约束第一时间差和第二时间差,可以避免因上述时间间隔过长导致的相位差反馈量准确度低的问题。具体如,上述第一时间差小于第一阈值,上述第二时间差小于上述第一阈值;或者,上述第一时间差小于或等于上述第一阈值,上述第二时间差小于或等于上述第一阈值。It can be understood that since the channel changes over time, in order to satisfy the reciprocity between the uplink channel and the downlink channel, that is, in order to make the change of the downlink channel itself reflected by the phase difference feedback amount between the first moment and the second moment equivalent to the change of the uplink channel itself between the third moment and the fourth moment, the time interval between the sending moment of the downlink reference signal and the sending moment of the SRS should be as small as possible, that is, the first time difference and the second time difference should be as small as possible. Therefore, this embodiment constrains the first time difference and the second time difference by setting a time upper limit (first threshold), which can avoid the problem of low accuracy of the phase difference feedback amount caused by the above-mentioned long time interval. Specifically, the above-mentioned first time difference is less than the first threshold, and the above-mentioned second time difference is less than the above-mentioned first threshold; or, the above-mentioned first time difference is less than or equal to the above-mentioned first threshold, and the above-mentioned second time difference is less than or equal to the above-mentioned first threshold.
示例性的,上述第一阈值可以满足如下任意一项:上述第一阈值等于第三时间差的四分之一,上述第三时间差为上述第三时刻与上述第四时刻的时间间隔;上述第一阈值等于上述第三时间差的五分之一;上述第一阈值等于上述第三时间差的八分之一;上述第一阈值等于5个时隙的时间;上述第一阈值等于2个 时隙的时间;上述第一阈值等于1个时隙的时间。Exemplarily, the first threshold may satisfy any one of the following: the first threshold is equal to one quarter of the third time difference, where the third time difference is the time interval between the third moment and the fourth moment; the first threshold is equal to one fifth of the third time difference; the first threshold is equal to one eighth of the third time difference; the first threshold is equal to the time of 5 time slots; the first threshold is equal to 2 The time of a time slot; the above-mentioned first threshold is equal to the time of 1 time slot.
可以理解的,时隙可基于子载波间隔确定,示例性的,在5G NR协议的规范下,若子载波间隔为15千赫兹(KHz),则对应的时隙可以是1毫秒,若子载波间隔为30KHz,则对应的时隙可以是0.5毫秒。It can be understood that the time slot can be determined based on the subcarrier spacing. For example, under the specification of the 5G NR protocol, if the subcarrier spacing is 15 kilohertz (KHz), the corresponding time slot can be 1 millisecond, and if the subcarrier spacing is 30KHz, the corresponding time slot can be 0.5 milliseconds.
可选的,还可以基于信道相干时间对上述第一时间差和上述第二时间差进行约束,以使每个下行参考信号的发送时刻与其对应的SRS的发送时刻的时间间隔尽可能小于信道相干时间,使得信道在两个时刻之间的变化不大,进一步可以使得通过下行参考信号测量的相位差(如上述相位差反馈量所指示的相位差)可以用来表示上行信道的相位差。示例性的,该信道相干时间可基于通信系统的载波频率和终端设备的移动速度确定,如,上述信道相干时间Tc可以满足如下关系:
Tc=c/(2fv)
Optionally, the first time difference and the second time difference may be constrained based on the channel coherence time, so that the time interval between the sending time of each downlink reference signal and the sending time of its corresponding SRS is as short as possible to the channel coherence time, so that the channel does not change much between the two times, and further, the phase difference measured by the downlink reference signal (such as the phase difference indicated by the above phase difference feedback amount) can be used to represent the phase difference of the uplink channel. Exemplarily, the channel coherence time can be determined based on the carrier frequency of the communication system and the moving speed of the terminal device, such as the channel coherence time Tc can satisfy the following relationship:
T c = c/(2fv)
其中,c为光速,f为通信系统的载波频率,v为终端设备的移动速度。Among them, c is the speed of light, f is the carrier frequency of the communication system, and v is the moving speed of the terminal device.
可选的,上述第一时间差和上述第二时间差的时间下限可基于通信协议帧结构的约束,和/或基于下行参考信号处理时序的约束(如基于该下行参考信号确定相位差反馈量的时序约束,和/或基于该下行参考信号确定对应的信道的时序约束)确定。示例性的,若终端设备需要1毫秒的时间完成上述下行参考信号处理,且终端设备在第四时刻同时发送SRS和相位差反馈量,则上述第二时间差的时间下限为1毫秒,否则终端设备无法在第四时刻之前完成相位差反馈量的计算。Optionally, the lower time limit of the first time difference and the second time difference can be determined based on the constraints of the communication protocol frame structure, and/or based on the constraints of the downlink reference signal processing timing (such as the timing constraints of determining the phase difference feedback amount based on the downlink reference signal, and/or the timing constraints of determining the corresponding channel based on the downlink reference signal). Exemplarily, if the terminal device requires 1 millisecond to complete the downlink reference signal processing, and the terminal device simultaneously sends the SRS and the phase difference feedback amount at the fourth moment, then the lower time limit of the second time difference is 1 millisecond, otherwise the terminal device cannot complete the calculation of the phase difference feedback amount before the fourth moment.
在一些可能的实施例中,在上述S402之前,该方法还可以包括:In some possible embodiments, before the above S402, the method may further include:
S404:第一通信装置接收第一指示信息。或者,第一通信装置发送上述第一指示信息。S404: The first communication device receives the first indication information. Alternatively, the first communication device sends the first indication information.
上述第一指示信息用于指示上述相位差反馈量对应的第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合中的任意一项或多项。The first indication information is used to indicate any one or more of the first port set, the second port set, the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount.
示例性的,按照第一指示信息的指示进行信号(如下行参考信号、估计的信道、SRS)的收发,有助于实现较为准确地接收/发送的信号。按照第一指示信息的指示进行相位差反馈量的计算,有助于实现准确的计算所述相位差反馈量。Exemplarily, receiving and transmitting a signal (such as a downlink reference signal, an estimated channel, or an SRS) according to the first indication information helps to achieve more accurate reception/transmission of the signal. Calculating the phase difference feedback amount according to the first indication information helps to achieve accurate calculation of the phase difference feedback amount.
可选的,在第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合之间的任意两项或两项以上建立有关联关系的情况下,第一指示信息也可以指示其中建立有关联关系的任意一项及以上,以及未与其它项建立关联关系的部分项。对应的,该第一指示信息的接收方可基于第一指示信息的指示以及该关联关系,获知上述相位差反馈量对应的第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合。可理解的,相较于全部指示第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合与上述相位差反馈量的对应关系,基于该关联关系指示上述对应关系可以减少第一指示信息的信息量,降低发送该第一指示信息的开销。Optionally, in the case where an association is established between any two or more of the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain base set, the first indication information may also indicate any one or more of the items among which an association is established, as well as some items that are not associated with other items. Correspondingly, the recipient of the first indication information may obtain the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain base set corresponding to the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount based on the indication of the first indication information and the association. It is understandable that, compared with indicating all the correspondences between the first port set, the second port set, the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain base set and the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount, indicating the above-mentioned correspondences based on the associations can reduce the amount of information in the first indication information and reduce the overhead of sending the first indication information.
举例来说,若第一端口集合与第二端口集合之间建立有关联关系,且在终端设备或网络设备中已经配置该关联关系的情况下,第一指示信息可以指示第一端口集合和第二端口集合中的任意一项,接收该第一指示信息的一方即可基于第一指示信息的指示以及该关联关系,获知上述相位差反馈量对应的第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合。可以理解的,此时第一指示信息还可以指示上述相位差反馈量对应的第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合。For example, if an association relationship is established between the first port set and the second port set, and the association relationship has been configured in the terminal device or the network device, the first indication information can indicate any one of the first port set and the second port set, and the party receiving the first indication information can obtain the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain base set corresponding to the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount based on the indication of the first indication information and the association relationship. It can be understood that at this time, the first indication information can also indicate the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain base set corresponding to the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount.
或者,若第一端口集合与第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合之间建立有关联关系,且在终端设备或网络设备中已经配置该关联关系的情况下,第一指示信息可以指示第一端口集合与频域位置集合或频域基底集合中的任意一项,接收该第一指示信息的一方即可基于该关联关系获知上述相位差反馈量对应的第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合。可以理解的,此时第一指示信息还可以指示上述相位差反馈量对应的第二端口集合。Alternatively, if an association relationship is established between the first port set and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain base set, and the association relationship has been configured in the terminal device or the network device, the first indication information can indicate the first port set and any one of the frequency domain position set or the frequency domain base set, and the party receiving the first indication information can obtain the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain base set corresponding to the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount based on the association relationship. It can be understood that at this time, the first indication information can also indicate the second port set corresponding to the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount.
或者,若第二端口集合与第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合之间建立有关联关系,第一指示信息可以指示第二端口集合与第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合中的任意一项,接收该第一指示信息的一方即可基于该关联关系获知上述相位差反馈量对应的第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合。可以理解的,此时第一指示信息还可以指示上述相位差反馈量对应的第一端口集合。Alternatively, if an association relationship is established between the second port set and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain base set, the first indication information can indicate any one of the second port set and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain base set, and the party receiving the first indication information can obtain the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain base set corresponding to the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount based on the association relationship. It can be understood that at this time, the first indication information can also indicate the first port set corresponding to the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount.
或者,若第一端口集合、第二端口集合与第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合之间建立有关联关系,第一指示信息可以指示第一端口集合、第二端口集合与频域位置集合或频域基底集合中的任意一项。应当说明的是,在终端设备或网络设备配置有以上任意一种关联关系的情况下,第一指示信息依然可以指示该关联关系所涉及的任意一项或多项,在此不作限定。Alternatively, if an association relationship is established between the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain base set, the first indication information may indicate any one of the first port set, the second port set, and the frequency domain position set or the frequency domain base set. It should be noted that, when the terminal device or network device is configured with any of the above association relationships, the first indication information may still indicate any one or more of the association relationships involved, which is not limited here.
在一些可能的实施例中,第一通信装置也可以采用隐式指示的方式指示上述相位差反馈量对应的第一 端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合中的任意一项或多项,即不使用单独的指示信息(第一指示信息)指示上述第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合,而是使用相关的通信协议标准里原有的下行参考信号(如CSI-RS)或SRS的指示信息,指示网络设备为终端设备配置的SRS对应的SRS端口信息、频域位置信息或频域基底信息(对应第二频域位置集合或第二频域基底集合),以及网络设备为终端设备配置的下行参考信号对应的下行参考信号端口信息、频域位置信息或频域基底信息(对应第三频域位置集合或第三频域基底集合)。相应的,上述方法还包括如下步骤:In some possible embodiments, the first communication device may also indicate the first corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount in an implicit indication manner. Any one or more of the port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set, that is, instead of using separate indication information (first indication information) to indicate the above-mentioned first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set, the original downlink reference signal (such as CSI-RS) or SRS indication information in the relevant communication protocol standard is used to indicate the SRS port information, frequency domain position information or frequency domain basis information (corresponding to the second frequency domain position set or the second frequency domain basis set) corresponding to the SRS configured by the network device for the terminal device, and the downlink reference signal port information, frequency domain position information or frequency domain basis information (corresponding to the third frequency domain position set or the third frequency domain basis set) corresponding to the downlink reference signal configured by the network device for the terminal device. Accordingly, the above method also includes the following steps:
S405:第一通信装置基于SRS端口信息,确定相位差反馈量对应的第一端口集合。S405: The first communication device determines a first port set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount based on the SRS port information.
S406:第一通信装置基于下行参考信号端口信息,确定该相位差反馈量对应的第二端口集合。S406: The first communication device determines a second port set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount based on the downlink reference signal port information.
S407:第一通信装置基于第二频域位置集合和第三频域位置集合,确定该相位差反馈量对应的第一频域位置集合。或者第一通信装置基于第二频域基底集合和第三频域基底集合,确定该相位差反馈量对应的第一频域基底集合。S407: The first communication device determines the first frequency domain position set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount based on the second frequency domain position set and the third frequency domain position set, or the first communication device determines the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount based on the second frequency domain basis set and the third frequency domain basis set.
示例性的,第一通信装置基于SRS对应的频域位置信息或频域基底信息,可确定第二频域位置集合或第二频域基底集合,基于下行参考信号对应的频域位置信息或频域基底信息,可确定第三频域位置集合或第三频域基底集合。然后,第一通信装置可基于第二频域位置集合和第三频域位置集合,确定该相位差反馈量对应的第一频域位置集合,可基于第二频域基底集合和第三频域基底集合,确定该相位差反馈量对应的第一频域基底集合。可选的,第一频域位置集合可以是第二频域位置集合和第三频域位置集合的交集,第一频域基底集合可以是第二频域基底集合和第三频域基底集合的交集。Exemplarily, the first communication device may determine the second frequency domain position set or the second frequency domain basis set based on the frequency domain position information or the frequency domain basis information corresponding to the SRS, and may determine the third frequency domain position set or the third frequency domain basis set based on the frequency domain position information or the frequency domain basis information corresponding to the downlink reference signal. Then, the first communication device may determine the first frequency domain position set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount based on the second frequency domain position set and the third frequency domain position set, and may determine the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount based on the second frequency domain basis set and the third frequency domain basis set. Optionally, the first frequency domain position set may be the intersection of the second frequency domain position set and the third frequency domain position set, and the first frequency domain basis set may be the intersection of the second frequency domain basis set and the third frequency domain basis set.
示例性的,第一通信装置发送的反馈信息中可以包含上述隐式指示的内容,对应的,第二通信装置接收到该反馈信息之后,可以基于该内容获知每个相位差反馈量对应的端口信息、频域位置或频域基底信息。Exemplarily, the feedback information sent by the first communication device may include the above-mentioned implicit indication content. Correspondingly, after receiving the feedback information, the second communication device may obtain the port information, frequency domain position or frequency domain base information corresponding to each phase difference feedback amount based on the content.
可理解的,相较于上述第一指示信息所对应的显式指示方式,上述隐式指示的方式可以简化SRS/下行参考信号的接收方和发送方之间关于第一端口集合、第二端口集合、第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合的交互流程。It can be understood that compared with the explicit indication method corresponding to the above-mentioned first indication information, the above-mentioned implicit indication method can simplify the interaction process between the receiver and sender of the SRS/downlink reference signal regarding the first port set, the second port set, the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set.
下面将结合图5对上述通信方法进行详细说明,图5是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的场景示意图。The above communication method will be described in detail below in conjunction with Figure 5, which is a scenario diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
如图5所示,上述通信方法可以包括如下步骤:As shown in FIG5 , the above communication method may include the following steps:
S501:第二通信装置基于至少一个第二端口集合,分别在第一时刻和第二时刻发送下行参考信号,所述第二端口集合包含一个或多个下行参考信号端口。S501: A second communication device sends a downlink reference signal at a first time and a second time respectively based on at least one second port set, where the second port set includes one or more downlink reference signal ports.
在本申请中,下行参考信号端口用于发送下行参考信号,可以是实体的物理天线端口,也可以是虚拟的逻辑天线端口。下行参考信号包括但不限于CSI-RS、TRS、PT-RS以及DM-RS中的任意一项。In the present application, a downlink reference signal port is used to send a downlink reference signal, which may be a physical antenna port or a virtual logical antenna port. The downlink reference signal includes but is not limited to any one of CSI-RS, TRS, PT-RS and DM-RS.
示例性的,网络设备可以基于各个下行参考信号端口之间是否相干,将各个下行参考信号端口划分为至少一个第二端口集合。其中,每个第二端口集合中的任意两个下行参考信号端口之间是相干的,即在每个第二端口集合中任意两个下行参考信号端口在同一时刻发送/接收信号时,该任意两个下行参考信号端口对应的发射/接收链路对信号的幅度和相位的影响是一致的。Exemplarily, the network device may divide each downlink reference signal port into at least one second port set based on whether each downlink reference signal port is coherent, wherein any two downlink reference signal ports in each second port set are coherent, that is, when any two downlink reference signal ports in each second port set send/receive signals at the same time, the transmission/reception links corresponding to the any two downlink reference signal ports have the same influence on the amplitude and phase of the signal.
S502:第二通信装置接收反馈信息,上述反馈信息用于指示多个相位差反馈量。S502: The second communication device receives feedback information, where the feedback information is used to indicate a plurality of phase difference feedback amounts.
上述相位差反馈量用于指示第一端口集合中的天线端口在上述第一时刻与上述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息;上述第一端口集合包含终端设备的一个或多个天线端口;上述第一端口集合对应上述多个相位差反馈量中的至少一个相位差反馈量。The above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the above-mentioned first moment and the above-mentioned second moment; the above-mentioned first port set includes one or more antenna ports of the terminal device; the above-mentioned first port set corresponds to at least one phase difference feedback amount among the above-mentioned multiple phase difference feedback amounts.
可以理解的,上述多个相位差反馈量中的任意一个相位差反馈量对应一个第二端口集合。可选的,若上述反馈信息仅指示一个相位差反馈量,则该相位差反馈量可唯一对应一个第二端口集合。关于S502的其它说明,可对应参考前述实施例中S402的介绍,在此不做赘述。It can be understood that any one of the above-mentioned multiple phase difference feedback amounts corresponds to a second port set. Optionally, if the above-mentioned feedback information only indicates one phase difference feedback amount, the phase difference feedback amount can uniquely correspond to a second port set. For other descriptions of S502, reference can be made to the introduction of S402 in the above-mentioned embodiment, and no further description is given here.
一般的,对上行信道估计结果来说,其相位信息中不仅包含因发射机(如上述终端设备的天线端口)硬件原因产生的随机相位的信息,还包含因信道本身随时间变化导致的相位变化。而在本申请中,由于下行参考信号一般不包含因发射机硬件原因产生的随机相位,上述相位差反馈量所指示的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息,可以反映出第一端口集合中的天线端口所对应的下行信道本身在第一时刻和第二时刻之间发生的变化,因此在将同一时刻的上行信道和下行信道视为相同的信道的情况下(如上行信道和下行信道满足互易性时),下行信道本身在第一时刻和第二时刻之间发生的变化可以等效于上行信道本身在该第一时刻和该第二时刻之间发生的变化。进一步的,网络设备基于上述相位差反馈量,可以排除上行信道估计 结果中因上行信道本身随时间变化导致的相位变化,继而可以确定上述随机相位的信息,有助于提高网络设备信道预测的准确度。In general, for the uplink channel estimation result, its phase information not only includes the random phase information generated by the hardware of the transmitter (such as the antenna port of the above-mentioned terminal device), but also includes the phase change caused by the change of the channel itself over time. In the present application, since the downlink reference signal generally does not include the random phase generated by the hardware of the transmitter, the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals indicated by the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount can reflect the changes in the downlink channel itself corresponding to the antenna port in the first port set between the first moment and the second moment. Therefore, when the uplink channel and the downlink channel at the same moment are regarded as the same channel (such as when the uplink channel and the downlink channel satisfy reciprocity), the changes in the downlink channel itself between the first moment and the second moment can be equivalent to the changes in the uplink channel itself between the first moment and the second moment. Furthermore, based on the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount, the network device can exclude the uplink channel estimation. The phase change in the result caused by the uplink channel itself changing over time can then determine the above-mentioned random phase information, which helps to improve the accuracy of channel prediction of network devices.
在一些可能的实施例中,在S502之后,基于该反馈信息所指示的相位差反馈量,网络设备还可以补偿上行信道中包含的SRS随机相位的差。示例性的,上述方法还可以包括如下步骤:In some possible embodiments, after S502, based on the phase difference feedback amount indicated by the feedback information, the network device may also compensate for the difference in the random phase of the SRS contained in the uplink channel. Exemplarily, the above method may also include the following steps:
S503:第二通信装置在第三时刻和第四时刻接收SRS。S503: The second communication device receives the SRS at the third time and the fourth time.
一般的,在第一通信装置发送的SRS没有受到干扰的情况下,第二通信装置的一个或多个接收端口接收到第一通信装置发送的SRS,因此第二通信装置需要基于所有接收到的SRS中确定与发送的下行参考信号波束方向一致的SRS,确定的方法是计算所有接收到的SRS在下行参考信号波束方向的投影。关于第二通信装置确定与发送的下行参考信号波束方向一致的SRS的具体实现,将在下文进行说明,在此先不展开介绍。Generally, when the SRS sent by the first communication device is not interfered, one or more receiving ports of the second communication device receive the SRS sent by the first communication device. Therefore, the second communication device needs to determine the SRS consistent with the beam direction of the sent downlink reference signal based on all received SRSs. The determination method is to calculate the projection of all received SRSs in the downlink reference signal beam direction. The specific implementation of the second communication device determining the SRS consistent with the beam direction of the sent downlink reference signal will be described below and will not be introduced here.
可选的,上述方法还可以包括:Optionally, the above method may further include:
S504:第二通信装置发送第一指示信息。或者,第二通信装置接收上述第一指示信息。S504: The second communication device sends the first indication information. Alternatively, the second communication device receives the first indication information.
上述第一指示信息用于指示上述相位差反馈量对应的第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合中的任意一项或多项。关于S504的实现方式可对应参考前述实施例S404的相关介绍,在此不做赘述。The first indication information is used to indicate any one or more of the first port set, the second port set, the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount. The implementation of S504 may refer to the relevant introduction of the aforementioned embodiment S404, which will not be described here.
S505:第二通信装置基于接收到的第三时刻和第四时刻的SRS,对上行信道进行信道估计,得到上行信道估计结果。S505: The second communication device performs channel estimation on the uplink channel based on the received SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment to obtain an uplink channel estimation result.
一般的,该上行信道可基于第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合确定。示例性的,第二通信装置接收到的反馈信息可以包含每个相位差反馈量对应的第一端口集合,以及每个相位差反馈量对应的第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合的信息,第二通信装置可基于此确定对应的上行信道,并对该上行信道进行信道估计,得到上行信道估计结果。示例性的,每个相位差反馈量对应的第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合可以通过显示指示或隐式指示的方式被指示,具体的实现方式及相关说明可参考S404的相关介绍,在此不做赘述。Generally, the uplink channel can be determined based on the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set. Exemplarily, the feedback information received by the second communication device may include the first port set corresponding to each phase difference feedback amount, and the information of the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to each phase difference feedback amount. The second communication device can determine the corresponding uplink channel based on this, and perform channel estimation on the uplink channel to obtain the uplink channel estimation result. Exemplarily, the first port set, the second port set, and the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to each phase difference feedback amount can be indicated by explicit indication or implicit indication. The specific implementation method and related instructions can refer to the relevant introduction of S404, which will not be repeated here.
S506:第二通信装置基于上述反馈信息指示的多个相位差反馈量和上述上行信道估计结果,补偿第二端口集合对应的SRS随机相位的差。S506: The second communication device compensates for the difference in SRS random phase corresponding to the second port set based on the multiple phase difference feedback amounts indicated by the feedback information and the uplink channel estimation result.
可以理解的,每个相位差反馈量对应的同一上行信道,相应的,每个相位差反馈量可对应同一上行信道的上行信道估计结果。可选的,在确定和补偿上述SRS随机相位的差之前,第二通信装置还可以基于第三时刻和第四时刻的上行信道估计结果,计算上行信道的相位差信息,然后基于该上行信道的相位差信息和对应的相位差反馈量,补偿上述SRS随机相位的差。It can be understood that each phase difference feedback amount corresponds to the same uplink channel, and accordingly, each phase difference feedback amount can correspond to the uplink channel estimation result of the same uplink channel. Optionally, before determining and compensating the above-mentioned SRS random phase difference, the second communication device can also calculate the phase difference information of the uplink channel based on the uplink channel estimation results at the third moment and the fourth moment, and then compensate the above-mentioned SRS random phase difference based on the phase difference information of the uplink channel and the corresponding phase difference feedback amount.
示例性的,可以确定并补偿第三时刻和第四时刻的SRS对应的随机相位的差。一般的,该上行信道的相位差信息包含因信道本身随时间变化导致的相位变化以及因SRS随机相位导致的相位变化,基于上下行信道的互易性,上述相位差反馈量所指示出的下行信道本身随时间变化导致的相位变化可以等效于上行信道本身随时间变化导致的相位变化,由此,在求得上述上行信道的相位差信息和上述相位差反馈量的情况下,第二通信装置可以获知SRS随机相位的信息,并可对不同时刻的SRS随机相位的差进行补偿,进一步的,第二通信装置基于补偿后的信道估计结果进行信道预测,可以提高信道预测的性能。Exemplarily, the difference in random phases corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment can be determined and compensated. In general, the phase difference information of the uplink channel includes the phase change caused by the change of the channel itself over time and the phase change caused by the random phase of the SRS. Based on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, the phase change caused by the change of the downlink channel itself over time indicated by the above phase difference feedback amount can be equivalent to the phase change caused by the change of the uplink channel itself over time. Therefore, when the phase difference information of the uplink channel and the above phase difference feedback amount are obtained, the second communication device can obtain the information of the random phase of the SRS and can compensate for the difference in the random phase of the SRS at different moments. Furthermore, the second communication device performs channel prediction based on the compensated channel estimation result, which can improve the performance of channel prediction.
图4和图5所示的方法中,其中一个方法中未详细描述的实现方式可以参考另一个方法,这里不作详述。示例性的,结合图4和图5,本申请实施例还提供了一种方法,如该方法可以包括上述S401和S402,以及S501和S502;又如,该方法可以包括S401、S402、S403,以及S501、S502、S503;又如,该方法可以包括S401、S402、S403,S404,以及S501、S502、S503,S504;又如,该方法可以包括S401、S402、S403、S405、S406、S407,以及S501、S502、S503。In the methods shown in Figures 4 and 5, the implementation method not described in detail in one method can refer to another method, which will not be described in detail here. Exemplarily, in combination with Figures 4 and 5, an embodiment of the present application also provides a method, such as the method may include the above-mentioned S401 and S402, and S501 and S502; for example, the method may include S401, S402, S403, and S501, S502, S503; for example, the method may include S401, S402, S403, S404, and S501, S502, S503, S504; for example, the method may include S401, S402, S403, S405, S406, S407, and S501, S502, S503.
示例性的,在图4和图5所示的方法中,相位差反馈量对应的计算公式可以是预先在标准中规定的,也可以是由第二通信装置向第一通信装置指示的。Exemplarily, in the methods shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 , the calculation formula corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount may be pre-specified in the standard, or may be indicated by the second communication device to the first communication device.
下面将以补偿两个时刻的SRS随机相位的差为例,结合本申请实施例提供的图6,进一步说明本申请提供的通信方法。图6是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的场景示意图。The following will take the compensation of the difference of the random phase of SRS at two moments as an example, and combine with Figure 6 provided in the embodiment of the present application to further illustrate the communication method provided by the present application. Figure 6 is a scene diagram of a communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
基于图4和图5对应的实施例的相关介绍,在本实施例中,下行链路(包含第二通信装置的发送链路和第一通信装置的接收链路)在不同时刻能够保持幅度和相位的一致性。则如图6所示,对于一个相位差反馈量,其计算过程可描述如下:Based on the relevant introduction of the embodiments corresponding to FIG4 and FIG5, in this embodiment, the downlink (including the transmission link of the second communication device and the reception link of the first communication device) can maintain the consistency of amplitude and phase at different times. As shown in FIG6, for a phase difference feedback amount, its calculation process can be described as follows:
S601:第二通信装置向第一通信装置发送资源指示信息。对应的,第一通信装置接收该资源指示信息。 S601: The second communication device sends resource indication information to the first communication device. Correspondingly, the first communication device receives the resource indication information.
示例性的,该资源指示信息可以用于指示两个时刻(第一时刻和第二时刻)的下行参考信号的资源位置与对应的两个时刻(第三时刻和第四时刻)的SRS的资源位置,使得每个下行参考信号时刻与对应的SRS时刻接近。上述下行参考信号可包括CSI-RS、TRS、PT-RS以及DM-RS中的任意一项。可理解的,上述下行参考信号时刻可以指发送/接收下行参考信号的时刻,上述SRS时刻可以指发送/接收SRS的时刻。关于下行参考信号时刻和SRS时刻的相关说明,可对应参考S403的相关介绍,在此不做赘述。Exemplarily, the resource indication information can be used to indicate the resource position of the downlink reference signal at two moments (the first moment and the second moment) and the resource position of the SRS at two corresponding moments (the third moment and the fourth moment), so that each downlink reference signal moment is close to the corresponding SRS moment. The above-mentioned downlink reference signal may include any one of CSI-RS, TRS, PT-RS and DM-RS. It can be understood that the above-mentioned downlink reference signal moment may refer to the moment of sending/receiving the downlink reference signal, and the above-mentioned SRS moment may refer to the moment of sending/receiving the SRS. For the relevant description of the downlink reference signal moment and the SRS moment, refer to the relevant introduction of S403, which will not be repeated here.
S602:第二通信装置按照上述资源指示信息所指示的下行参考信号资源位置,在该下行参考信号资源位置处发送下行参考信号。对应的,第一通信装置接收该下行参考信号。S602: The second communication device sends a downlink reference signal at the downlink reference signal resource location indicated by the resource indication information. Correspondingly, the first communication device receives the downlink reference signal.
示例性的,第二通信装置可以分别在上述第一时刻和上述第二时刻发送下行参考信号。对应的,第一通信装置接收该下行参考信号。Exemplarily, the second communication device may send a downlink reference signal at the first time and the second time respectively. Correspondingly, the first communication device receives the downlink reference signal.
S603:第一通信装置基于接收到的下行参考信号,进行下行信道估计,并基于不同时刻的下行信道估计结果,计算相位差反馈量。S603: The first communication device performs downlink channel estimation based on the received downlink reference signal, and calculates a phase difference feedback amount based on downlink channel estimation results at different times.
示例性的,第一时刻和第二时刻的下行信道估计的结果分别为由于同一个下行链路在不同时刻能保持幅度和相位的一致性,则可满足如下关系:

Exemplarily, the results of downlink channel estimation at the first moment and the second moment are respectively Since the same downlink can maintain the consistency of amplitude and phase at different times, The following relationship can be satisfied:

其中,分别为第一时刻和第二时刻的真实的下行信道。分别是第一时刻和第二时刻的下行信道估计的误差。in, and are the real downlink channels at the first moment and the second moment respectively. are the errors of downlink channel estimation at the first moment and the second moment respectively.
然后,第一通信装置基于可计算得到相位差反馈量δ,则δ可满足如下关系:
Then, the first communication device is based on The phase difference feedback amount δ can be calculated, and δ can satisfy the following relationship:
其中,计算公式f须满足,对于任意信道矢量h1,h2,任意相位幅度以下等式成立:
The calculation formula f must satisfy that for any channel vector h 1 ,h 2 , any phase Amplitude The following equation holds:
上述公式的含义是,作为刻画相位差的函数,计算结果与幅度a1,a2无关,与相位的关系仅取决于二者之差。其中,与h1相乘可以使h1中的每个元素的幅角旋转θ1,同样的,与h2相乘可以使h2中的每个元素的幅角旋转θ2。示例性的,公式f可以是预先在标准中规定的,也可以是由第二通信装置向第一通信装置指示的,关于公式f的具体的形式,会在下文进一步说明。The meaning of the above formula is that as a function of describing the phase difference, the calculation result has nothing to do with the amplitude a 1 , a 2 , but has nothing to do with the phase The relationship between them depends only on the difference between them. Multiplying by h 1 can rotate the argument of each element in h 1 by θ 1 . Similarly, Multiplication with h 2 can rotate the argument of each element in h 2 by θ 2. Exemplarily, formula f may be pre-specified in the standard or indicated by the second communication device to the first communication device. The specific form of formula f will be further described below.
S604:第一通信装置按照上述资源指示信息所指示的SRS资源位置,在该SRS资源位置处发送SRS。对应的,第二通信装置接收该SRS。S604: The first communication device sends an SRS at the SRS resource location indicated by the resource indication information. Correspondingly, the second communication device receives the SRS.
示例性的,第一通信装置可以分别在上述第三时刻和上述第四时刻发送下行参考信号。对应的,第二通信装置接收该下行参考信号。Exemplarily, the first communication device may send a downlink reference signal at the third time and the fourth time respectively, and correspondingly, the second communication device receives the downlink reference signal.
可以理解的,S604的执行顺序可以在S603之前或之后,在此不作限定。示例性的,可基于第一通信装置计算相位差反馈量的能力,确定S604和S603的执行顺序,以实现灵活适应不同计算能力的第一通信装置。It is understandable that the execution order of S604 may be before or after S603, which is not limited here. Exemplarily, the execution order of S604 and S603 may be determined based on the capability of the first communication device to calculate the phase difference feedback amount, so as to flexibly adapt to first communication devices with different computing capabilities.
S605:第二通信装置基于接收到的SRS,进行上行信道估计,并基于不同时刻的上行信道估计结果,计算上行信道对应的相位差信息。S605: The second communication device performs uplink channel estimation based on the received SRS, and calculates phase difference information corresponding to the uplink channel based on uplink channel estimation results at different times.
示例性的,第一时刻和第二时刻(或称第三时刻和第四时刻)的上行信道估计的结果分别为受SRS随机相位的影响,可满足如下关系:

Exemplarily, the results of uplink channel estimation at the first time and the second time (or the third time and the fourth time) are respectively Affected by the random phase of SRS, The following relationship can be satisfied:

其中,分别是第三时刻和第四时刻的SRS随机相位,分别为第一时刻和第二时刻的真实的上行信道,分别是第三时刻和第四时刻的上行信道估计的误差。in, are the SRS random phases at the third and fourth moments, and are the real uplink channels at the first and second moments respectively, are the uplink channel estimation errors at the third moment and the fourth moment respectively.
由于每个下行参考信号时刻与对应的SRS时刻接近,可认为信道在下行参考信号发送时刻与SRS发送时刻之间基本不发生变化,上下行信道满足互易性,即 Since each downlink reference signal is close to the corresponding SRS time, it can be considered that the channel does not change substantially between the downlink reference signal sending time and the SRS sending time, and the uplink and downlink channels satisfy reciprocity, that is,
然后,第二通信装置基于可计算得到上行信道在第三时刻和第四时刻的相位差信息δ′,则δ′可以满足如下关系:
Then, the second communication device is based on The phase difference information δ′ of the uplink channel at the third moment and the fourth moment can be calculated, and δ′ can satisfy the following relationship:
进一步的,δ′可以满足如下关系:
Furthermore, δ′ can satisfy the following relationship:
S606:第一通信装置发送相位差反馈量。对应的,第二通信装置接收该相位差反馈量。 S606: The first communication device sends a phase difference feedback value, and correspondingly, the second communication device receives the phase difference feedback value.
示例性的,S605的执行顺序可在第一通信装置发送第四时刻的SRS之前或之后,第一通信装置也可以在发送第四时刻的SRS时同步发送或携带该相位差反馈量,在此不作限定。关于S606的其它说明可对应参考前述实施例中S402的相关介绍,在此不做赘述。Exemplarily, the execution order of S605 may be before or after the first communication device sends the SRS at the fourth moment, and the first communication device may also synchronously send or carry the phase difference feedback amount when sending the SRS at the fourth moment, which is not limited here. Other descriptions of S606 may refer to the relevant introduction of S402 in the aforementioned embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
S607:第二通信装置基于上述相位差反馈量和上述上行信道的相位差信息,确定和补偿SRS随机相位的差。S607: The second communication device determines and compensates for the SRS random phase difference based on the phase difference feedback amount and the phase difference information of the uplink channel.
假设信道估计误差可以忽略不计,由于以下等式成立:

Assuming that the channel estimation error is negligible, the following equation holds true:

则第二通信装置只需计算δ′-δ,由于δ′-δ=θ21(mod 2π),就可以得到两个时刻的SRS的随机相位之差θ21The second communication device only needs to calculate δ′-δ. Since δ′-δ=θ 21 (mod 2π), the difference θ 21 between the random phases of the SRS at two moments can be obtained.
最后,进行SRS随机相位差补偿,得到的补偿后的值的计算方法如下:
Finally, perform SRS random phase difference compensation to obtain The compensated value The calculation method is as follows:
则随机相位差补偿后的结果满足如下关系:
Then the result after random phase difference compensation satisfies the following relationship:
可以理解的,之间的相位差信息中已消除了第三时刻和第四时刻对应的SRS随机相位的差,即相位差补偿后的中的随机相位是相同的随机相位可以理解成,之间具有相位的一致性,因此信道随时间变化的规律不再受到上述相同的随机相位的影响。当第二通信装置基于分析信道变化的规律,进行信道预测时,随机相位的差的影响已被消除,可以提高信道预测的性能。Understandably, and The phase difference information between the third moment and the fourth moment has eliminated the difference in the SRS random phase corresponding to the third moment, that is, after the phase difference compensation and The random phase in is the same random phase It can be understood as, and There is phase consistency between them, so the law of channel changes over time is no longer subject to the same random phase When the second communication device is based on and By analyzing the law of channel changes and performing channel prediction, the influence of random phase differences has been eliminated, which can improve the performance of channel prediction.
示例性的,本申请中基于下行参考信号和SRS估计的信道,可以对应于不同时刻全部发射接收端口、全部频域/频域基底的全信道矩阵,也可以对应于信道矩阵在部分发射接收端口、全部或部分频域/频域基底的部分信道元素(可理解,一个信道元素可对应信道中的一个位置上的值),还可以对应于信道矩阵在部分或全部发射接收端口、部分频域/频域基底的部分信道元素。在此不作限定。可理解的,对于基于下行参考信号估计的下行信道,上述发射接收端口包括接收和发送该下行参考信号的天线端口,对于基于SRS估计的上行信道,上述发射接收端口包括发送和接收该SRS的天线端口。在实施本申请提供的通信方法时,上述发射接收端口可以包括至少一个第一端口集合、至少一个第二端口集合,上述频域/频域基底可以包括第一频域位置集合/第一频域基底集合。Exemplarily, the channel estimated based on the downlink reference signal and SRS in the present application may correspond to the full channel matrix of all transmit and receive ports and all frequency domains/frequency domain bases at different times, or may correspond to the partial channel elements of the channel matrix at some transmit and receive ports and all or part of the frequency domain/frequency domain bases (it can be understood that a channel element may correspond to the value at a position in the channel), or may correspond to the partial channel elements of the channel matrix at some or all transmit and receive ports and part of the frequency domain/frequency domain bases. No limitation is made here. It can be understood that for the downlink channel estimated based on the downlink reference signal, the above-mentioned transmit and receive port includes an antenna port for receiving and sending the downlink reference signal, and for the uplink channel estimated based on the SRS, the above-mentioned transmit and receive port includes an antenna port for sending and receiving the SRS. When implementing the communication method provided in the present application, the above-mentioned transmit and receive port may include at least one first port set and at least one second port set, and the above-mentioned frequency domain/frequency domain base may include a first frequency domain position set/a first frequency domain base set.
下面将基于图4、图5、图6及其相关的实施例,对相位差反馈量的计算公式进行说明。The calculation formula of the phase difference feedback amount will be described below based on FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 6 and related embodiments.
在一些可能的实施例中,上述相位差反馈量所指示的第一端口集合中的天线端口在第一时刻与第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息,可以直接用第一端口集合中的天线端口在第一时刻与第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息来表示,以缩减相位差反馈量的计算过程,降低计算开销。In some possible embodiments, the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the downlink reference signals received at the second moment can be directly represented by the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment, so as to shorten the calculation process of the phase difference feedback amount and reduce the calculation overhead.
示例性的,该下行参考信号之间的相位差信息为第一端口集合中的天线端口在该第一时刻和该第二时刻接收的下行参考信号的互相关的相位信息,其中,互相关可用于表示第一时刻与第二时刻的下行参考信号之间的相似性,该下行参考信号的互相关的相位信息为基于互相关算法计算得到的第一时刻与第二时刻的下行参考信号之间的相位差。具体的,基于该互相关算法,相位差反馈量δ可以满足如下关系:
Exemplarily, the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals is the phase information of the cross-correlation of the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment, wherein the cross-correlation can be used to indicate the similarity between the downlink reference signals at the first moment and the second moment, and the cross-correlation phase information of the downlink reference signals is the phase difference between the downlink reference signals at the first moment and the second moment calculated based on the cross-correlation algorithm. Specifically, based on the cross-correlation algorithm, the phase difference feedback amount δ can satisfy the following relationship:
其中,δ是第一端口集合的天线端口在第一时刻与第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差。复数幅角(argument of a complex number,arg)函数用于计算复数的相位。y1,y2分别是第一时刻和第二时刻指定的第一端口集合、第二端口集合、第一频域位置集合/第一频域基底集合对应的下行参考信号组成的列向量。是y1的共轭转置得到的行向量,是取和y2内积的相位。对应的,第一通信装置可以反馈和y2内积的相位。Wherein, δ is the phase difference between the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports of the first port set at the first moment and the second moment. The complex argument (arg) function is used to calculate the phase of the complex number. y 1 ,y 2 are column vectors consisting of the downlink reference signals corresponding to the first port set, the second port set, the first frequency domain position set/the first frequency domain basis set specified at the first moment and the second moment, respectively. is the row vector obtained by conjugate transpose of y 1 , Yes and the phase of the inner product of y 2. Correspondingly, the first communication device can feedback The phase of the inner product of y and y 2 .
示例性的,除了上述计算下行参考信号互相关的相位之外,还可以将第一端口集合的天线端口在第一时刻与第二时刻接收到的下行参考信号投影在相同的基底B上,然后计算下行参考信号投影的互相关的相位变化量δ。具体的,在第一时刻和第二时刻接收到的下行参考信号y1和y2对应的投影结果可满足如下关系:

Exemplarily, in addition to calculating the phase of the cross-correlation of the downlink reference signal as described above, the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports of the first port set at the first moment and the second moment may be projected onto the same base B, and then the phase change δ of the cross-correlation of the downlink reference signal projections is calculated. Specifically, the projection results corresponding to the downlink reference signals y1 and y2 received at the first moment and the second moment are and The following relationship can be satisfied:

其中,基底B满足BHB是单位矩阵,BH是B的共轭转置得到的行向量。相应的,下行参考信号投影的互相关的相位变化量δ可满足如下关系:
Wherein, the basis B satisfies B H B is the unit matrix, and B H is the row vector obtained by the conjugate transpose of B. Accordingly, the phase change δ of the cross-correlation of the downlink reference signal projection can satisfy the following relationship:
其中,arg函数用于取复数的相位,的共轭转置矩阵,表示取内积的相位。相应的,第一通信装置反馈内积的相位。Among them, the arg function is used to take the phase of the complex number, yes The conjugate transposed matrix of Indicates taking and The phase of the inner product. Accordingly, the first communication device feedbacks and The phase of the inner product.
示例性的,除了上述计算下行参考信号组成的向量或其投影向量的互相关的相位之外,还可以计算下行参考信号中的特定元素(标量)共轭相乘的相位。相当于,选取的第二端口集合仅包含索引为i的一个下行参考信号端口,选取的第一端口集合仅包含索引为j的一个天线端口,选取的频率位置集合仅包含索引为k的频域子载波对应的频率位置,对应的第一时刻和第二时刻接收的下行参考信号分别为则假设该特定信道元素对应的相位差反馈量为δi,j,k,则δi,j,k可以满足如下关系:
Exemplarily, in addition to the above-mentioned calculation of the phase of the cross-correlation of the vector composed of the downlink reference signal or its projection vector, the phase of the conjugate multiplication of specific elements (scalars) in the downlink reference signal can also be calculated. Equivalent to the selected second port set only including a downlink reference signal port with index i, the selected first port set only including an antenna port with index j, the selected frequency position set only including the frequency position corresponding to the frequency domain subcarrier with index k, and the corresponding downlink reference signals received at the first moment and the second moment are respectively Assuming that the phase difference feedback amount corresponding to the specific channel element is δ i,j,k , δ i,j,k can satisfy the following relationship:
其中,互为共轭复数。表示取乘积的相位。相应的,第一通信装置反馈乘积的相位。in, and are conjugate complex numbers of each other. Indicates taking and Accordingly, the first communication device feeds back and The phase of the product.
可理解的,上述i,j,k的取值可以由第二通信装置向第一通信装置指定,也可以由第一通信装置向第二通信装置指定,还可以由第一通信装置基于第二通信装置指示的下行参考信号资源配置和SRS资源配置确定,具体实现方式可对应参考前述实施例中关于显式指示和隐式指示的相关介绍,在此不做赘述。关于该特定信道元素所对应的其它相关计算步骤可对应参考图6中相应的计算方法,在此不做赘述。It can be understood that the values of i, j, and k can be specified by the second communication device to the first communication device, or by the first communication device to the second communication device, or can be determined by the first communication device based on the downlink reference signal resource configuration and SRS resource configuration indicated by the second communication device. The specific implementation method can refer to the relevant introduction of explicit indication and implicit indication in the aforementioned embodiment, which will not be described in detail here. The other relevant calculation steps corresponding to the specific channel element can refer to the corresponding calculation method in Figure 6, which will not be described in detail here.
在一些可能的实施例中,上述相位差反馈量所指示的第一端口集合中的天线端口在第一时刻与第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息,也可以用第一端口集合中的天线端口在第一时刻与第二时刻的信道之间的相位差信息来表示,以提高相位差反馈量的准确度。In some possible embodiments, the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment indicated by the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount can also be represented by the phase difference information between the channels of the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment, so as to improve the accuracy of the phase difference feedback amount.
示例性的,上述信道之间的相位差信息是第一时刻与第二时刻的信道的互相关的相位信息。其中,第一时刻的信道可以基于第一端口集合中的天线端口在第一时刻接收的下行参考信号确定,第二时刻的信道可以基于第一端口集合中的天线端口在第二时刻接收的下行参考信号确定。如第一通信装置可基于第一端口集合中的天线端口在第一时刻和第二时刻接收的下行参考信号,分别对第一端口集合中的天线端口对应的下行信道进行信道估计,可得到上述第一时刻的信道和上述第二时刻的信道,示例性的,该第一时刻的信道和第二时刻的信道可用CSI或信道系数表示。互相关可用于表示第一时刻与第二时刻的信道之间的相似性,该信道的互相关的相位信息为基于互相关算法计算得到的第一时刻与第二时刻的信道之间的相位差。具体的,基于该互相关算法,相位差反馈量δ可以满足如下关系:
Exemplarily, the phase difference information between the above-mentioned channels is the phase information of the cross-correlation of the channels at the first moment and the second moment. Among them, the channel at the first moment can be determined based on the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port in the first port set at the first moment, and the channel at the second moment can be determined based on the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port in the first port set at the second moment. For example, the first communication device can perform channel estimation on the downlink channels corresponding to the antenna ports in the first port set based on the downlink reference signals received by the antenna ports in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment, respectively, and the channel at the first moment and the channel at the second moment can be obtained. Exemplarily, the channel at the first moment and the channel at the second moment can be represented by CSI or channel coefficients. Cross-correlation can be used to represent the similarity between the channels at the first moment and the second moment, and the cross-correlation phase information of the channels is the phase difference between the channels at the first moment and the second moment calculated based on the cross-correlation algorithm. Specifically, based on the cross-correlation algorithm, the phase difference feedback amount δ can satisfy the following relationship:
其中,δ是第一端口集合的天线端口在第一时刻与第二时刻的信道之间的相位差。arg函数用于计算复数的相位。h1,h2分别是第一时刻和第二时刻指定的第一端口集合、第二天线端口集合、第一频域位置集合/第一频域基底集合对应的信道组成的列向量。是h1的共轭转置得到的行向量,是取和h2内积的相位。对应的,第一通信装置可以反馈和h2内积的相位。Wherein, δ is the phase difference between the channels of the antenna ports of the first port set at the first moment and the second moment. The arg function is used to calculate the phase of a complex number. h 1 ,h 2 are column vectors consisting of the channels corresponding to the first port set, the second antenna port set, the first frequency domain position set/the first frequency domain basis set specified at the first moment and the second moment, respectively. is the row vector obtained by conjugate transpose of h 1 , Yes and the phase of the inner product of h 2. Correspondingly, the first communication device can feedback and the phase of the inner product of h2 .
示例性的,除了上述计算信道互相关的相位之外,还可以将第一时刻的信道和第二时刻的信道投影在相同的基底B上,然后计算估计信道的投影的互相关的相位变化量δ。具体的,在第一时刻的信道h1和第二时刻的信道h2对应的投影结果可满足如下关系:

Exemplarily, in addition to calculating the phase of the channel cross-correlation as described above, the channel at the first moment and the channel at the second moment may be projected onto the same basis B, and then the phase change δ of the cross-correlation of the estimated channel projections may be calculated. Specifically, the projection result corresponding to the channel h1 at the first moment and the channel h2 at the second moment is and The following relationship can be satisfied:

其中,基底B是一个正交矩阵,满足BHB是单位矩阵,其中BH是B的共轭转置矩阵。相应的,估计的信道的投影的互相关的相位变化量δ可满足如下关系:
Wherein, the basis B is an orthogonal matrix, satisfying B H B is the unit matrix, where B H is the conjugate transposed matrix of B. Accordingly, the phase change δ of the cross-correlation of the estimated channel projections can satisfy the following relationship:
其中,arg函数用于取复数的相位,的共轭转置得到的行向量,表示取内积的相位。相应的,第一通信装置反馈内积的相位。Among them, the arg function is used to take the phase of the complex number, yes The row vector obtained by conjugate transpose of Indicates taking and The phase of the inner product. Accordingly, the first communication device feedbacks and The phase of the inner product.
可以理解的,第一通信装置在计算相位差反馈量时使用的是基于接收的下行参考信号或基于该下行参考信号估计得到的信道,相应的,第二通信装置确定和补偿SRS随机相位的差时使用的是基于接收的SRS估计得到的信道。It can be understood that when calculating the phase difference feedback amount, the first communication device uses a channel based on the received downlink reference signal or estimated based on the downlink reference signal. Correspondingly, when the second communication device determines and compensates for the SRS random phase difference, it uses a channel estimated based on the received SRS.
同样的,上述估计的信道也可以对应特定信道元素,关于特定信道元素的相关说明可对应参考前述实施例中的介绍,在此不做赘述。Similarly, the estimated channel may also correspond to a specific channel element. For the relevant description of the specific channel element, reference may be made to the introduction in the aforementioned embodiment, which will not be elaborated herein.
可选的,上述第一时刻的信道和上述第二时刻的信道可以用相应的CSI估计结果或信道系数(信道系数可以是该CSI估计结果中的部分系数)表示。示例性的,若用CSI估计结果表示,则上述信道的互相关 的相位信息可以用于表示第一时刻的CSI估计结果与第二时刻的CSI估计结果之间的相位差信息,基于该相位差信息确定相位差反馈量,可以提高相位差反馈量的准确度。若用信道系数表示,则上述信道的互相关的相位信息可以用于表示第一时刻的信道系数与第二时刻的信道系数之间的相位差信息,基于该相位差信息确定相位差反馈量。如果选取了受到CSI中其它信号特征产生的噪声干扰影响较小的信道系数,可以降低噪声干扰的影响,进一步提高相位差反馈量的准确度。Optionally, the channel at the first moment and the channel at the second moment may be represented by corresponding CSI estimation results or channel coefficients (the channel coefficients may be partial coefficients in the CSI estimation results). Exemplarily, if represented by CSI estimation results, the cross-correlation of the channels is The phase information can be used to represent the phase difference information between the CSI estimation result at the first moment and the CSI estimation result at the second moment. The phase difference feedback amount is determined based on the phase difference information, which can improve the accuracy of the phase difference feedback amount. If expressed by channel coefficients, the phase information of the cross-correlation of the above channels can be used to represent the phase difference information between the channel coefficients at the first moment and the channel coefficients at the second moment, and the phase difference feedback amount is determined based on the phase difference information. If a channel coefficient that is less affected by noise interference generated by other signal features in the CSI is selected, the impact of noise interference can be reduced, and the accuracy of the phase difference feedback amount can be further improved.
示例性的,基于图4至图6所对应的实施例,第一通信装置发送的反馈信息可以同时包含上述下行参考信号之间的相位差信息和上述信道之间的相位差信息。可选的,第二通信装置可基于以上任意一种或两种相位差信息进行信道预测以及下行传输,在此不作限定。Exemplarily, based on the embodiments corresponding to Figures 4 to 6, the feedback information sent by the first communication device may include both the phase difference information between the above-mentioned downlink reference signals and the phase difference information between the above-mentioned channels. Optionally, the second communication device may perform channel prediction and downlink transmission based on any one or both of the above phase difference information, which is not limited here.
可选的,基于图4至图6所对应的实施例,第一通信装置发送的反馈信息也可以包含不同时刻下行参考信号的相位和/或估计的信道的相位,对应的,第一通信装置可基于接收到的下行参考信号的相位和/或估计的信道的相位计算上述相位差反馈量。以第二时刻为例,下行参考信号和/或基于该下行参考信号估计的信道表示为则下行参考信号和/或基于该下行参考信号估计的信道的相位可以表示为δ,则δ可满足如下关系:
Optionally, based on the embodiments corresponding to FIG. 4 to FIG. 6, the feedback information sent by the first communication device may also include the phase of the downlink reference signal and/or the phase of the estimated channel at different times. Correspondingly, the first communication device may calculate the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount based on the phase of the received downlink reference signal and/or the phase of the estimated channel. Taking the second moment as an example, the downlink reference signal and/or the channel estimated based on the downlink reference signal is expressed as Then the phase of the downlink reference signal and/or the channel estimated based on the downlink reference signal can be expressed as δ, and δ can satisfy the following relationship:
其中,计算公式f须满足,对于任意信道矢量h,任意相位幅度以下等式成立:
f(ah)=θ+f(h)(mod 2π)
The calculation formula f must satisfy that for any channel vector h, any phase Amplitude The following equation holds:
f(ah)=θ+f(h)(mod 2π)
其中,f(h)(mod 2π)表示令f(h)对2π取余。例如,f(h)可以是一个固定的向量e与h的内积的相位,即f(h)=arg(eHh)。同样的,反馈下行参考信号的相位和/或估计的信道的相位的方法也可适用于特定信道元素,关于特定信道元素的相关说明可对应参考前述实施例中的介绍,在此不做赘述。Wherein, f(h)(mod 2π) means to make f(h) modulo 2π. For example, f(h) may be the phase of the inner product of a fixed vector e and h, that is, f(h)=arg(e H h). Similarly, the method of feeding back the phase of the downlink reference signal and/or the phase of the estimated channel may also be applicable to specific channel elements. For the relevant description of the specific channel elements, please refer to the introduction in the aforementioned embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
可以理解的,以上实施例所示出的相位差反馈量的计算公式仅是本申请提供的可能的示例,并不对本申请构成限定。It can be understood that the calculation formula of the phase difference feedback amount shown in the above embodiment is only a possible example provided by the present application and does not constitute a limitation to the present application.
示例性的,在终端设备包含两个第一端口集合的情况下,第一通信装置可分别计算并反馈每个第一端口集合对应的相位差反馈量。下面将以补偿SRS随机相位为例,结合图7a和图7b进行详细说明。图7a是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的场景示意图,图7b是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的交互示意图。Exemplarily, when the terminal device includes two first port sets, the first communication device may respectively calculate and feed back the phase difference feedback amount corresponding to each first port set. The following will take the compensation of the SRS random phase as an example, and will be described in detail in conjunction with Figures 7a and 7b. Figure 7a is a scene schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application, and Figure 7b is an interactive schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
如图7a所示,以NR通信协议下5ms帧结构为例,横轴为时间,每个方块表示一个时隙(slot)。其中,“D”表示下行slot,“S”表示特殊slot,“U”表示上行slot。假设一个子帧包含一个slot,则D子帧指示下行数据可在该子帧被发送,S子帧指示特殊字段下行导频时隙(downlink pilot time slot,DwPTS)、保护间隔(guard period,GP)、和上行导频时隙(uplink pilot time slot,UpPTS)在该子帧中被发送。U子帧指示上行数据可以在该子帧中被发送。可理解的,一个子帧包含一个slot仅是本申请提供的一种示例,在此不作限定。As shown in Figure 7a, taking the 5ms frame structure under the NR communication protocol as an example, the horizontal axis is time, and each square represents a time slot. Among them, "D" represents a downlink slot, "S" represents a special slot, and "U" represents an uplink slot. Assuming that a subframe contains one slot, the D subframe indicates that downlink data can be sent in the subframe, and the S subframe indicates that the special fields downlink pilot time slot (downlink pilot time slot, DwPTS), guard period (guard period, GP), and uplink pilot time slot (uplink pilot time slot, UpPTS) are sent in the subframe. The U subframe indicates that uplink data can be sent in the subframe. It can be understood that a subframe containing a slot is only an example provided by this application and is not limited here.
以一个网络设备对应一个终端设备为例,该终端设备包含2个天线端口(天线端口0和天线端口1),具有1个发射通道和2个接收通道,即在同一时刻天线端口0和天线端口1不能同时发送SRS,在第一通信装置发送SRS时,需要通过天线选择的方式,在两个不同的时刻发送SRS,示例性的,前一个时刻用天线端口0发送SRS,后一个时刻用天线端口1发送SRS。示例性的,天线端口0和天线端口1不具有相干能力,可分别对应两个不同的第一端口集合。应当理解的,本实施例所示出的终端设备的天线端口数量、及发射/接收通道配置仅是一种示例,在此不作限定。For example, a network device corresponds to a terminal device. The terminal device includes two antenna ports (antenna port 0 and antenna port 1), one transmit channel and two receive channels, that is, antenna port 0 and antenna port 1 cannot send SRS at the same time. When the first communication device sends SRS, it is necessary to send SRS at two different times by antenna selection. Exemplarily, antenna port 0 is used to send SRS at the previous moment, and antenna port 1 is used to send SRS at the next moment. Exemplarily, antenna port 0 and antenna port 1 do not have coherent capabilities and can correspond to two different first port sets respectively. It should be understood that the number of antenna ports and transmit/receive channel configuration of the terminal device shown in this embodiment is only an example and is not limited here.
如图7a所示,向上的虚线箭头所指示的是终端设备天线端口0的SRS资源,向上的实线箭头所指示的是终端设备天线端口1的SRS资源,向下的实线箭头所指示的是下行参考信号资源(如CSI-RS资源)。在NR协议的帧结构下,下行参考信号和SRS资源的配置方式可以为:对于每个特殊slot,在最后两个正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)符号上分别为天线端口0和天线端口1配置SRS资源(如在倒数第2个OFDM符号上为天线端口0配置SRS资源,在倒数第1个OFDM符号上为天线端口1配置SRS资源),在倒数第3个OFDM符号上配置了一个下行参考信号端口的下行参考信号资源,且SRS与下行参考信号配置在多个相同的频域子载波上。As shown in FIG. 7a, the upward dotted arrow indicates the SRS resource of antenna port 0 of the terminal device, the upward solid arrow indicates the SRS resource of antenna port 1 of the terminal device, and the downward solid arrow indicates the downlink reference signal resource (such as CSI-RS resource). Under the frame structure of the NR protocol, the downlink reference signal and SRS resource can be configured as follows: for each special slot, the SRS resources are configured for antenna port 0 and antenna port 1 respectively on the last two orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols (such as configuring SRS resources for antenna port 0 on the second-to-last OFDM symbol and configuring SRS resources for antenna port 1 on the first-to-last OFDM symbol), and a downlink reference signal resource of a downlink reference signal port is configured on the third-to-last OFDM symbol, and the SRS and the downlink reference signal are configured on multiple identical frequency domain subcarriers.
示例性的,第二通信装置可通过一个或多个指示信息(如前述实施例中的第一指示信息)向第一通信装置指示下行参考信号配置、SRS配置以及相位差反馈量的配置。具体的,在本实施例中可以配置两个相位差反馈量。第一个相位差反馈量对应的下行参考信号端口集合(对应前述实施例中的第二端口集合)是上述倒数第3个OFDM符号的下行参考信号端口,对应的SRS天线端口集合(对应前述实施例中的第一 端口集合)是天线端口0,对应的频率索引集合(对应前述实施例中的第一频域位置集合)是下行参考信号和SRS配置的子载波索引集合。示例性的,第一频域位置集合可以是下行参考信号配置的子载波索引集合与SRS配置的子载波索引集合的交集。第二个相位差反馈量对应的下行参考信号端口集合、频率索引集合与第一个相位差反馈量相同,对应的SRS天线端口集合是天线端口1。Exemplarily, the second communication device may indicate the downlink reference signal configuration, SRS configuration, and phase difference feedback configuration to the first communication device through one or more indication information (such as the first indication information in the aforementioned embodiment). Specifically, two phase difference feedback amounts may be configured in this embodiment. The downlink reference signal port set corresponding to the first phase difference feedback amount (corresponding to the second port set in the aforementioned embodiment) is the downlink reference signal port of the third-to-last OFDM symbol, and the corresponding SRS antenna port set (corresponding to the first port set in the aforementioned embodiment) is the downlink reference signal port of the third-to-last OFDM symbol. The first frequency domain position set) is antenna port 0, and the corresponding frequency index set (corresponding to the first frequency domain position set in the aforementioned embodiment) is the subcarrier index set of the downlink reference signal and SRS configuration. Exemplarily, the first frequency domain position set can be the intersection of the subcarrier index set of the downlink reference signal configuration and the subcarrier index set of the SRS configuration. The downlink reference signal port set and frequency index set corresponding to the second phase difference feedback amount are the same as the first phase difference feedback amount, and the corresponding SRS antenna port set is antenna port 1.
下面以基于在不同时刻接收的下行参考信号的互相关的相位计算相位差反馈量为例,进一步介绍上述方法。请参阅图7b,基于图7a所示的应用场景,上述方法可以包括如下步骤:The method is further described below by taking the phase difference feedback amount calculated based on the phase correlation of the downlink reference signals received at different times as an example. Referring to FIG. 7b , based on the application scenario shown in FIG. 7a , the method may include the following steps:
S701:第二通信装置基于下行参考信号端口在第一时刻和第二时刻发送下行参考信号。相应的,第一通信装置基于天线端口0在第一时刻和第二时刻接收下行参考信号。S701: The second communication device sends a downlink reference signal at a first time and a second time based on a downlink reference signal port. Correspondingly, the first communication device receives a downlink reference signal at a first time and a second time based on antenna port 0.
S702:第一通信装置基于天线端口0在第一时刻和第二时刻接收的下行参考信号,计算相位差反馈量。S702: The first communication device calculates a phase difference feedback amount based on the downlink reference signal received by antenna port 0 at the first time and the second time.
示例性的,天线端口0在第一时刻从所有下行参考信号所在的子载波上接收的下行参考信号为y1,天线端口0在第二时刻从所有下行参考信号所在的子载波上接收的下行参考信号为y2,则第一通信装置可基于y1和y2,计算相位差反馈量δ,其中δ可满足如下关系:
Exemplarily, the downlink reference signal received by antenna port 0 from the subcarriers where all downlink reference signals are located at the first moment is y 1 , and the downlink reference signal received by antenna port 0 from the subcarriers where all downlink reference signals are located at the second moment is y 2 , then the first communication device may calculate the phase difference feedback amount δ based on y 1 and y 2 , where δ may satisfy the following relationship:
其中,arg函数用于取复数的相位,的共轭转置得到的行向量,表示取内积的相位。相应的,第一通信装置反馈内积的相位。Among them, the arg function is used to take the phase of the complex number, yes The row vector obtained by conjugate transpose of Indicates taking and The phase of the inner product. Accordingly, the first communication device feedbacks and The phase of the inner product.
S703:第一通信装置向第二通信装置发送反馈信息,该反馈信息用于指示该相位差反馈量。对应的,第二通信装置接收该反馈信息指示的相位差反馈量。S703: The first communication device sends feedback information to the second communication device, where the feedback information is used to indicate the phase difference feedback amount. Correspondingly, the second communication device receives the phase difference feedback amount indicated by the feedback information.
关于S703的具体实现,可对应参考前述实施例中S402或S502的介绍,在此不做赘述。Regarding the specific implementation of S703, reference may be made to the introduction of S402 or S502 in the aforementioned embodiments, and detailed description is omitted here.
S704:第一通信装置基于天线端口0在第三时刻和第四时刻向第二通信装置发送SRS。对应的,第二通信装置基于下行参考信号端口在第三时刻和第四时刻接收SRS。S704: The first communication device sends an SRS to the second communication device at a third time and a fourth time based on antenna port 0. Correspondingly, the second communication device receives the SRS at a third time and a fourth time based on a downlink reference signal port.
为满足下行信道与上行信道之间的互易性,第一时刻与第三时刻之间的时间间隔(对应前述实施例中的第一时间差)、第二时刻与第四时刻之间的时间间隔(对应前述实施例中的第二时间差)应当尽可能的小,关于第一时间差和第二时间差的具体介绍,可对应参考前述实施例中S403的相关介绍,在此不做赘述。可以理解的,S704中发送第四时刻的SRS的执行顺序可以在S703或S702之前或之后,还可以与S703同步执行,在此不作限定。In order to satisfy the reciprocity between the downlink channel and the uplink channel, the time interval between the first moment and the third moment (corresponding to the first time difference in the aforementioned embodiment) and the time interval between the second moment and the fourth moment (corresponding to the second time difference in the aforementioned embodiment) should be as small as possible. For the specific introduction of the first time difference and the second time difference, please refer to the relevant introduction of S403 in the aforementioned embodiment, which will not be repeated here. It can be understood that the execution order of sending the SRS at the fourth moment in S704 can be before or after S703 or S702, and can also be executed synchronously with S703, which is not limited here.
S705:第二通信装置基于下行参考信号端口接收的第三时刻和第四时刻的SRS,计算上行信道的相位差信息。S705: The second communication device calculates the phase difference information of the uplink channel based on the SRS at the third time and the fourth time received by the downlink reference signal port.
示例性的,假设终端设备的天线端口0发出的SRS没有受到干扰,网络设备侧的所有天线端口可以接收到终端设备的天线端口0发送的SRS,进一步的,第二通信装置可从所有天线端口接收到的SRS中确定与该第一通信装置接收到的下行参考信号波束方向一致的SRS,并计算在下行参考信号波束方向的投影。Exemplarily, assuming that the SRS sent by antenna port 0 of the terminal device is not interfered with, all antenna ports on the network device side can receive the SRS sent by antenna port 0 of the terminal device. Furthermore, the second communication device can determine the SRS that is consistent with the downlink reference signal beam direction received by the first communication device from the SRS received by all antenna ports, and calculate the projection in the downlink reference signal beam direction.
具体的,第二通信装置采用一个指向该第一通信装置的波束发送下行参考信号,波束赋形采用的权值矢量为p。第三时刻和第四时刻网络设备所有天线端口接收到的SRS分别为S1,S2。对于S1,S2,矩阵的列数为网络设备的天线数,矩阵的行数为SRS对应的子载波数,则S1,S2在上述下行参考信号波束方向上的投影z1和z2可满足如下关系:
z1=S1p
z2=S2p
Specifically, the second communication device uses a beam pointing to the first communication device to send a downlink reference signal, and the weight vector used for beamforming is p. The SRS received by all antenna ports of the network device at the third moment and the fourth moment are S 1 and S 2 respectively. For S 1 and S 2 , the number of columns of the matrix is the number of antennas of the network device, and the number of rows of the matrix is the number of subcarriers corresponding to the SRS, then the projections z 1 and z 2 of S 1 and S 2 in the above downlink reference signal beam direction can satisfy the following relationship:
z 1 =S 1 p
z 2 =S 2 p
则上行信道的相位差信息δ′可满足如下关系:
Then the phase difference information δ′ of the uplink channel can satisfy the following relationship:
S706:第二通信装置基于上行信道的相位差信息和上述相位差反馈量,确定并补偿SRS随机相位的差。S706: The second communication device determines and compensates for the SRS random phase difference based on the phase difference information of the uplink channel and the above phase difference feedback amount.
可以理解的,上行信道的相位差信息δ′中同时包含信道本身在两个时刻之间发生的相位变化与SRS随机相位带来的相位差,则δ′-δ则可作为SRS随机相位差的估计值。It can be understood that the phase difference information δ′ of the uplink channel includes both the phase change of the channel itself between two moments and the phase difference caused by the SRS random phase, and δ′-δ can be used as an estimated value of the SRS random phase difference.
进一步的,在补偿SRS随机相位差时,只要在第二时刻的SRS的相位上减掉该相位差反馈量即可,即计算S2e-j(δ′-δ)=S2ej(δ-δ′)。或者,也可以不对S2进行补偿,可以先在第二时刻基于SRS估计得到包含SRS随机相位差的信道,再乘以ej(δ-δ′)Furthermore, when compensating for the SRS random phase difference, it is sufficient to subtract the phase difference feedback amount from the phase of the SRS at the second moment, that is, to calculate S 2 e -j(δ′-δ) =S 2 e j(δ-δ′) . Alternatively, S 2 may not be compensated, and a channel containing the SRS random phase difference may be first estimated based on the SRS at the second moment, and then multiplied by e j(δ-δ′) .
示例性的,第二通信装置在每个时刻补偿与前一时刻的SRS随机相位的差,按照时间顺序依次补偿,可实现先后校正所有的SRS随机相位与前一个时刻的SRS随机相位的差,提高信道预测结果的准确度。Exemplarily, the second communication device compensates for the difference between the SRS random phase at each moment and the previous moment, and compensates in chronological order, so as to correct the differences between all SRS random phases and the SRS random phase at the previous moment in succession, thereby improving the accuracy of the channel prediction results.
同样的,对第二个相位差反馈量采用相同的方法,第二通信装置可以确定并补偿终端设备天线端口1对应的SRS随机相位的差,在此不做赘述。Similarly, the same method is used for the second phase difference feedback amount, and the second communication device can determine and compensate for the difference in the SRS random phase corresponding to the antenna port 1 of the terminal device, which will not be elaborated here.
在一种可能的实施例中,上述反馈信息可以包含每个相位差反馈量与第一端口集合、第二端口集合、 第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合中的任意一项或多项的对应关系,以便于第二通信装置基于该对应关系确定和补偿SRS随机相位的差。关于上述对应关系的介绍以及指示该对应关系的具体实现,可对应参考前述实施例S404的相关介绍,在此不做赘述。In a possible embodiment, the feedback information may include each phase difference feedback amount and the first port set, the second port set, The correspondence between any one or more of the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set is to facilitate the second communication device to determine and compensate for the difference in the SRS random phase based on the correspondence. For the introduction of the above correspondence and the specific implementation of indicating the correspondence, please refer to the relevant introduction of the aforementioned embodiment S404, which will not be repeated here.
可以理解的,在本实施例中,由于每个第一通信装置反馈的是不同时刻的下行参考信号的相位变化,不反馈估计的信道本身,计算量较小,并且对应的反馈开销也很低,可以实现用多个比特位进行高精度相位反馈。It can be understood that in this embodiment, since each first communication device feeds back the phase change of the downlink reference signal at different times and does not feed back the estimated channel itself, the amount of calculation is small and the corresponding feedback overhead is also low, and high-precision phase feedback can be achieved using multiple bits.
示例性的,第二通信装置在估计上行信道时对应的计算公式、补偿SRS随机相位的差时对应的计算公式也可以与第一通信装置计算相位反馈量的计算公式保持一致,以避免因计算公式不同导致的计算错误或计算过程冗杂,提高随机相位差补偿的准确度和效率。Exemplarily, the calculation formula corresponding to the second communication device when estimating the uplink channel and the calculation formula corresponding to the compensation of the SRS random phase difference may also be consistent with the calculation formula for calculating the phase feedback amount by the first communication device, so as to avoid calculation errors or complicated calculation process due to different calculation formulas, and improve the accuracy and efficiency of random phase difference compensation.
示例性的,本实施例所示出的相位差反馈量的计算公式仅是一种示例,实际上还可以适应性地选择前述实施例中的任意一种计算公式。Exemplarily, the calculation formula for the phase difference feedback amount shown in this embodiment is only an example, and in fact, any calculation formula in the aforementioned embodiments can be adaptively selected.
下面将以补偿SRS随机相位的差为例,结合图8介绍下行参考信号和SRS配置在相同的频域带宽但不同的子载波的场景下,进一步介绍本申请提供的通信方法。图8是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的场景示意图。The following will take the compensation of the SRS random phase difference as an example, and further introduce the communication method provided by the present application in the scenario where the downlink reference signal and SRS are configured in the same frequency domain bandwidth but different subcarriers in combination with Figure 8. Figure 8 is a scenario schematic diagram of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如图8所示,以一个网络设备对应一个终端设备为例,终端设备包含2个天线端口(天线端口0和天线端口1),整个带宽分成两个跳频带宽(跳频带宽1和跳频带宽2),天线端口0和天线端口1通过跳频的方式发送SRS。As shown in FIG8 , taking a case where a network device corresponds to a terminal device as an example, the terminal device includes two antenna ports (antenna port 0 and antenna port 1), and the entire bandwidth is divided into two frequency hopping bandwidths (frequency hopping bandwidth 1 and frequency hopping bandwidth 2). Antenna port 0 and antenna port 1 send SRS by frequency hopping.
如图8所示,向上的虚线箭头所指示的是终端设备天线端口0发送的SRS,向上的实线箭头所指示的是终端设备天线端口1发送的SRS,向下的实线箭头所指示的是网络设备的下行参考信号端口发送的下行参考信号。在NR协议的帧结构下,下行参考信号和SRS资源的配置方式可以为:每个特殊slot的倒数第3个OFDM符号上,第二通信装置使用网络设备的天线0在整个带宽上发送下行参考信号(如CSI-RS)。倒数第2个OFDM符号上,终端设备天线端口0在跳频带宽1上发送SRS,在跳频带宽2上不发送,终端设备天线端口1在跳频带宽1上不发送,跳频带宽2上发送SRS。最后1个OFDM符号上,终端设备的两个天线端口互相交换发送SRS的跳频带宽。下行参考信号与SRS在相同的带宽内占用不同的子载波,但是能保证信道估计时可以通过特定的信道估计算法估计得到带宽内所有子载波的信道。As shown in Figure 8, the upward dotted arrow indicates the SRS sent by the antenna port 0 of the terminal device, the upward solid arrow indicates the SRS sent by the antenna port 1 of the terminal device, and the downward solid arrow indicates the downlink reference signal sent by the downlink reference signal port of the network device. Under the frame structure of the NR protocol, the configuration method of the downlink reference signal and SRS resources can be: on the third-to-last OFDM symbol of each special slot, the second communication device uses the antenna 0 of the network device to send a downlink reference signal (such as CSI-RS) over the entire bandwidth. On the second-to-last OFDM symbol, the antenna port 0 of the terminal device sends SRS on the frequency hopping bandwidth 1, and does not send it on the frequency hopping bandwidth 2. The antenna port 1 of the terminal device does not send it on the frequency hopping bandwidth 1, and sends SRS on the frequency hopping bandwidth 2. On the last OFDM symbol, the two antenna ports of the terminal device exchange the frequency hopping bandwidth for sending SRS. The downlink reference signal and SRS occupy different subcarriers in the same bandwidth, but it can be guaranteed that the channel of all subcarriers in the bandwidth can be estimated by a specific channel estimation algorithm during channel estimation.
示例性的,配置四个相位差反馈量,第二通信装置可发送显式指示信息向第一通信装置指示每个相位差反馈量对应的终端设备侧的天线端口和跳频带宽。具体如:上述四个相位差反馈量可以分别是天线端口0在跳频带宽1上基于下行参考信号估计得到的信道的互相关的相位、天线端口0在跳频带宽2上基于下行参考信号估计得到的信道的互相关的相位、天线端口1在跳频带宽1上基于下行参考信号估计得到的信道的互相关的相位、天线端口1在跳频带宽2上基于下行参考信号估计得到的信道的互相关的相位。其中,关于显示指示信息的具体实现,可对应参考前述实施例中关于第一指示信息的介绍,在此不做赘述。Exemplarily, four phase difference feedback quantities are configured, and the second communication device may send explicit indication information to the first communication device to indicate the antenna port and frequency hopping bandwidth on the terminal device side corresponding to each phase difference feedback quantity. Specifically, the above four phase difference feedback quantities may be respectively the phase of the cross-correlation of the channel estimated based on the downlink reference signal at antenna port 0 on frequency hopping bandwidth 1, the phase of the cross-correlation of the channel estimated based on the downlink reference signal at antenna port 0 on frequency hopping bandwidth 2, the phase of the cross-correlation of the channel estimated based on the downlink reference signal at antenna port 1 on frequency hopping bandwidth 1, and the phase of the cross-correlation of the channel estimated based on the downlink reference signal at antenna port 1 on frequency hopping bandwidth 2. Among them, regarding the specific implementation of displaying the indication information, reference may be made to the introduction of the first indication information in the aforementioned embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
以计算第一个相位差反馈量为例,对应的下行参考信号端口集合是上述倒数第3个OFDM符号对应的下行参考信号端口,该下行参考信号端口对应网络设备的天线0,对应的终端设备天线端口集合(第一端口集合)是天线端口0,对应的频率索引集合(第一频域位置集合)是跳频带宽1内的全部子载波索引的集合。Taking the calculation of the first phase difference feedback amount as an example, the corresponding downlink reference signal port set is the downlink reference signal port corresponding to the third to last OFDM symbol mentioned above, and the downlink reference signal port corresponds to antenna 0 of the network device. The corresponding terminal device antenna port set (first port set) is antenna port 0, and the corresponding frequency index set (first frequency domain position set) is the set of all subcarrier indexes within the frequency hopping bandwidth 1.
第一通信装置在天线端口0、跳频带宽1上接收下行参考信号,估计终端设备的天线端口1在跳频带宽1包含的所有子载波上的下行信道,两个时刻分别为h1,h2,则第一通信装置计算的相位差反馈量δ可以满足如下关系:
The first communication device receives a downlink reference signal at antenna port 0 and frequency hopping bandwidth 1, and estimates the downlink channel of antenna port 1 of the terminal device on all subcarriers included in frequency hopping bandwidth 1. The two moments are h 1 and h 2 respectively. Then the phase difference feedback amount δ calculated by the first communication device can satisfy the following relationship:
然后第一通信装置向第二通信装置反馈该相位差反馈量δ。第二通信装置基于特殊slot中倒数第2个OFDM符号上的网络设备天线0收到的SRS,估计出终端设备的天线端口0、跳频带宽1包含的所有子载波的上行信道。The first communication device then feeds back the phase difference feedback amount δ to the second communication device. The second communication device estimates the uplink channels of all subcarriers included in antenna port 0 and frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the terminal device based on the SRS received by the network device antenna 0 on the second to last OFDM symbol in the special slot.
由于第一个相位差反馈量与上述估计的上行信道对应相同的端口集合与频域索引集合,第二通信装置可以确定并补偿终端设备的天线端口0、跳频带宽1的SRS随机相位的差,采用的确定并补偿随机相位的差的方法可对应参考图6所对应的实施例的相关介绍,在此不做赘述。另外三个相位差反馈量,基于同样的方法分别确定并补偿终端设备天线端口0在跳频带宽2上的SRS随机相位的差、终端设备天线端口1在跳频带宽1上的SRS随机相位的差、终端设备天线端口1在跳频带宽2上的SRS随机相位的差,在此不做赘述。 Since the first phase difference feedback amount corresponds to the same port set and frequency domain index set as the above-mentioned estimated uplink channel, the second communication device can determine and compensate for the difference in SRS random phase of antenna port 0 and frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the terminal device. The method used to determine and compensate for the difference in random phase can correspond to the relevant introduction of the embodiment corresponding to reference Figure 6, which will not be described in detail here. The other three phase difference feedback amounts are based on the same method to respectively determine and compensate for the difference in SRS random phase of antenna port 0 of the terminal device on frequency hopping bandwidth 2, the difference in SRS random phase of antenna port 1 of the terminal device on frequency hopping bandwidth 1, and the difference in SRS random phase of antenna port 1 of the terminal device on frequency hopping bandwidth 2, which will not be described in detail here.
在本实施例中,可以为终端设备的不同天线端口、不同跳频带宽分别配置相位差反馈量,该相位差反馈量分别与终端设备的不同天线端口、不同跳频带宽发送的SRS对应,适用于终端设备多个天线端口在多次跳频之间不具有相干能力的场景。可理解的,在本实施例中,第一通信装置仅需接收一个下行参考信号端口发送的下行参考信号,可降低下行参考信号开销。并且通过先估计所有子载波上的信道,再计算相位差反馈量,适用于下行参考信号和SRS配置在相同的带宽但是不同的子载波上的场景,进一步的,可以配合具有降噪能力的信道估计算法,在低信噪比下,相比直接计算下行参考信号的相位差,相位差反馈量具有更高的精度,反馈开销很低,可以实现用多个比特进行高精度相位反馈。In this embodiment, phase difference feedback amounts can be configured for different antenna ports and different frequency hopping bandwidths of the terminal device, respectively. The phase difference feedback amounts correspond to the SRS sent by different antenna ports and different frequency hopping bandwidths of the terminal device, respectively, and are applicable to scenarios where multiple antenna ports of the terminal device do not have coherence capabilities between multiple frequency hoppings. It can be understood that in this embodiment, the first communication device only needs to receive a downlink reference signal sent by a downlink reference signal port, which can reduce the downlink reference signal overhead. And by first estimating the channels on all subcarriers and then calculating the phase difference feedback amount, it is applicable to scenarios where the downlink reference signal and SRS are configured in the same bandwidth but on different subcarriers. Furthermore, it can be combined with a channel estimation algorithm with noise reduction capability. Under low signal-to-noise ratio, compared with directly calculating the phase difference of the downlink reference signal, the phase difference feedback amount has higher accuracy, and the feedback overhead is very low, and high-precision phase feedback can be achieved using multiple bits.
示例性的,本实施例所示出的相位差反馈量的计算公式仅是一种示例,实际上还可以适应性地选择前述实施例中的任意一种计算公式。Exemplarily, the calculation formula for the phase difference feedback amount shown in this embodiment is only an example, and in fact, any calculation formula in the aforementioned embodiments can be adaptively selected.
示例性的,在终端设备包含至少两个第一端口集合,且每个第一端口集合中包含至少两个天线端口时,可以基于每个第一端口集合中的天线端口接收到的下行参考信号进行信道估计,再将估计的信道进行拼接然后计算相位差反馈量,以使第一端口集合中的每个天线端口共享该相位差反馈量,降低反馈开销。Exemplarily, when the terminal device includes at least two first port sets and each first port set includes at least two antenna ports, channel estimation can be performed based on the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port in each first port set, and the estimated channel is spliced and then the phase difference feedback amount is calculated, so that each antenna port in the first port set shares the phase difference feedback amount, thereby reducing feedback overhead.
下面将以补偿SRS随机相位的差为例,结合图9a和图9b进行详细说明。图9a是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的场景示意图,图9b是本申请实施例提供的一种基于通信方法的交互示意图。The following will take the compensation of the SRS random phase difference as an example and explain in detail in conjunction with Figure 9a and Figure 9b. Figure 9a is a scene diagram of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application, and Figure 9b is an interaction diagram based on the communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如图9a所示,以NR通信协议下5ms帧结构为例,横轴为时间,每个方块表示一个时隙(slot)。其中,“D”表示下行slot,“S”表示特殊slot,“U”表示上行slot。假设一个子帧包含一个slot,则D子帧指示下行数据可在该子帧被发送,S子帧指示特殊字段DwPTS、GP、和UpPTS在该子帧中被发送。U子帧指示上行数据可以在该子帧中被发送。可理解的,一个子帧包含一个slot仅是本申请提供的一种示例,在此不作限定。As shown in Figure 9a, taking the 5ms frame structure under the NR communication protocol as an example, the horizontal axis is time, and each square represents a time slot. Among them, "D" represents a downlink slot, "S" represents a special slot, and "U" represents an uplink slot. Assuming that a subframe contains a slot, the D subframe indicates that downlink data can be sent in the subframe, and the S subframe indicates that the special fields DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS are sent in the subframe. The U subframe indicates that uplink data can be sent in the subframe. It can be understood that a subframe containing a slot is only an example provided by this application and is not limited here.
以一个网络设备对应一个终端设备为例,该终端设备包含4个天线端口(天线端口0、天线端口1、天线端口2、天线端口3),具有2个发射通道和4个接收通道。在第一通信装置发送SRS时,需要通过天线选择的方式,在两个不同的时刻发送SRS,示例性的,前一个时刻用天线端口0和天线端口1发送SRS,后一个时刻用天线端口2和天线端口3发送SRS。示例性的,天线端口0和天线端口1具有相干能力,可包含于一个第一端口集合,天线端口2和天线端口3具有相干能力,可包含于另一个第一端口集合。应当理解的,本实施例所示出的终端设备的天线端口数量、及发射/接收通道配置仅是一种示例,在此不作限定。Taking one network device corresponding to one terminal device as an example, the terminal device includes 4 antenna ports (antenna port 0, antenna port 1, antenna port 2, antenna port 3), 2 transmit channels and 4 receive channels. When the first communication device sends SRS, it is necessary to send SRS at two different times by antenna selection. Exemplarily, antenna port 0 and antenna port 1 are used to send SRS at the previous moment, and antenna port 2 and antenna port 3 are used to send SRS at the next moment. Exemplarily, antenna port 0 and antenna port 1 have coherent capabilities and can be included in a first port set, and antenna port 2 and antenna port 3 have coherent capabilities and can be included in another first port set. It should be understood that the number of antenna ports and transmit/receive channel configuration of the terminal device shown in this embodiment is only an example and is not limited here.
如图9a所示,向上的虚线箭头所指示的是终端设备天线端口0和天线端口1的SRS资源,向上的实线箭头所指示的是终端设备天线端口2和天线端口3的SRS资源,向下的实线箭头所指示的是下行参考信号资源(如CSI-RS资源)。在NR协议的帧结构下,下行参考信号和SRS资源的配置方式可以为:对于每个特殊slot,在最后两个OFDM符号上分别为天线端口0、1和天线端口2、3配置SRS资源(如在倒数第2个OFDM符号上为天线端口0、1配置SRS资源,在倒数第1个OFDM符号上为天线端口2、3配置SRS资源),在倒数第3个OFDM符号上配置了一个下行参考信号端口的下行参考信号资源,且SRS与下行参考信号配置在多个相同的频域子载波上。As shown in FIG9a, the upward dotted arrow indicates the SRS resources of antenna port 0 and antenna port 1 of the terminal device, the upward solid arrow indicates the SRS resources of antenna port 2 and antenna port 3 of the terminal device, and the downward solid arrow indicates the downlink reference signal resources (such as CSI-RS resources). Under the frame structure of the NR protocol, the downlink reference signal and SRS resources can be configured as follows: for each special slot, SRS resources are configured for antenna ports 0 and 1 and antenna ports 2 and 3 respectively on the last two OFDM symbols (such as configuring SRS resources for antenna ports 0 and 1 on the second-to-last OFDM symbol, and configuring SRS resources for antenna ports 2 and 3 on the first-to-last OFDM symbol), and a downlink reference signal resource of a downlink reference signal port is configured on the third-to-last OFDM symbol, and the SRS and the downlink reference signal are configured on multiple identical frequency domain subcarriers.
示例性的,第二通信装置向第一通信装置指示下行参考信号配置、SRS配置,然后采用隐式指示的方式指示相位差反馈量的配置,即不额外发送用于指示相位差反馈量配置的指示信息(对应前述实施例中的第一指示信息),相应的,第一通信装置可以基于该下行参考信号配置、SRS配置,确定相位差反馈量的配置。其中关于隐式指示的具体实现,可对应参考前述实施例中S405至S407的相关介绍,在此不做赘述。Exemplarily, the second communication device indicates the downlink reference signal configuration and SRS configuration to the first communication device, and then indicates the configuration of the phase difference feedback amount in an implicit manner, that is, no additional indication information for indicating the configuration of the phase difference feedback amount (corresponding to the first indication information in the aforementioned embodiment) is sent. Accordingly, the first communication device can determine the configuration of the phase difference feedback amount based on the downlink reference signal configuration and SRS configuration. The specific implementation of the implicit indication can be referred to the relevant introduction of S405 to S407 in the aforementioned embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
具体的,在本实施例中可以配置两个相位差反馈量。第一个相位差反馈量对应的下行参考信号端口集合(对应前述实施例中的第二端口集合)是上述倒数第3个OFDM符号的下行参考信号端口,对应的SRS天线端口集合(对应前述实施例中的第一端口集合)是天线端口0、1,对应的频率索引集合(对应前述实施例中的第一频域位置集合)是下行参考信号和SRS配置的子载波索引集合(对应前述实施例中的第二频域位置集合和第三频域位置集合)。示例性的,第一频域位置集合可以是下行参考信号配置的子载波索引集合与SRS配置的子载波索引集合的交集。第二个相位差反馈量对应的下行参考信号端口集合、频率索引集合与第一个相位差反馈量相同,对应的SRS天线端口集合是天线端口2、3。Specifically, two phase difference feedback amounts can be configured in this embodiment. The downlink reference signal port set corresponding to the first phase difference feedback amount (corresponding to the second port set in the aforementioned embodiment) is the downlink reference signal port of the third-to-last OFDM symbol, the corresponding SRS antenna port set (corresponding to the first port set in the aforementioned embodiment) is antenna ports 0 and 1, and the corresponding frequency index set (corresponding to the first frequency domain position set in the aforementioned embodiment) is the subcarrier index set of the downlink reference signal and SRS configuration (corresponding to the second frequency domain position set and the third frequency domain position set in the aforementioned embodiment). Exemplarily, the first frequency domain position set can be the intersection of the subcarrier index set of the downlink reference signal configuration and the subcarrier index set of the SRS configuration. The downlink reference signal port set and frequency index set corresponding to the second phase difference feedback amount are the same as the first phase difference feedback amount, and the corresponding SRS antenna port set is antenna ports 2 and 3.
下面以基于在不同时刻估计的信道的互相关的相位计算相位差反馈量为例,进一步介绍上述方法,请参阅图9b,基于图9a所示的应用场景,上述方法可以包括如下步骤:The method is further described below by taking the phase difference feedback amount calculated based on the phase of the cross-correlation of the channel estimated at different times as an example. Please refer to FIG. 9b. Based on the application scenario shown in FIG. 9a, the method may include the following steps:
S901:第二通信装置基于下行参考信号端口在第一时刻和第二时刻发送下行参考信号。相应的,第一通信装置基于天线端口0、1在第一时刻和第二时刻接收下行参考信号。S901: The second communication device sends a downlink reference signal at a first time and a second time based on a downlink reference signal port. Correspondingly, the first communication device receives a downlink reference signal at a first time and a second time based on antenna ports 0 and 1.
可以理解的,第二通信装置发送下行参考信号的时刻与第一通信装置接收该下行参考信号的时刻之间 有延时,本申请为了便于描述,将发送下行参考信号的时刻与接收该下行参考信号的时刻均用第一时刻和第二时刻描述。It can be understood that the time between the time when the second communication device sends the downlink reference signal and the time when the first communication device receives the downlink reference signal There is a delay. For the convenience of description, the instant of sending a downlink reference signal and the instant of receiving the downlink reference signal are described as the first instant and the second instant.
S902:第一通信装置基于天线端口0、1在第一时刻和第二时刻接收的下行参考信号,计算相位差反馈量。S902: The first communication device calculates a phase difference feedback amount based on downlink reference signals received by antenna ports 0 and 1 at the first time and the second time.
示例性的,第一通信装置基于天线端口0、1在第一时刻和第二时刻接收的下行参考信号对天线端口0、1对应的下行信道进行信道估计,得到天线端口0的下行信道和天线端口1的下行信道hPORT0,hPORT1,将hPORT0和hPORT1拼接成矢量h,则h可满足如下关系:
h=[(hPORT0)T,(hPORT1)T]T
Exemplarily, the first communication device performs channel estimation on the downlink channels corresponding to antenna ports 0 and 1 based on the downlink reference signals received by antenna ports 0 and 1 at the first time and the second time, and obtains the downlink channel of antenna port 0 and the downlink channel of antenna port 1 h PORT0 ,h PORT1 , and splices h PORT0 and h PORT1 into a vector h, then h can satisfy the following relationship:
h=[(h PORT0 ) T ,(h PORT1 ) T ] T
其中,(hPORT0)T是hPORT0的转置,(hPORT1)T是hPORT1的转置。Among them, (h PORT0 ) T is the transpose of h PORT0 , and (h PORT1 ) T is the transpose of h PORT1 .
可理解的,假设两个时刻对应的拼接矢量可以分别为h1,h2,则上述相位差反馈量δ可以满足如下关系:
It can be understood that, assuming that the splicing vectors corresponding to the two moments can be h 1 and h 2 respectively, the above phase difference feedback amount δ can satisfy the following relationship:
其中,arg函数用于取复数的相位,是h1的共轭转置得到的行向量,表示取与h2内积的相位,相应的,第一通信装置反馈与h2内积的相位。Among them, the arg function is used to take the phase of the complex number, is the row vector obtained by conjugate transpose of h 1 , Indicates taking The phase of the inner product with h 2 , correspondingly, the first communication device feedback The phase of the inner product with h 2 .
S903:第一通信装置向第二通信装置发送该相位差反馈量。对应的,第二通信装置接收该相位差反馈量。S903: The first communication device sends the phase difference feedback value to the second communication device. Correspondingly, the second communication device receives the phase difference feedback value.
关于S903的具体实现,可对应参考前述实施例中S402或S502的相关介绍,在此不做赘述。Regarding the specific implementation of S903, reference may be made to the relevant introduction of S402 or S502 in the aforementioned embodiments, and will not be elaborated here.
S904:第一通信装置基于天线端口0、1在第三时刻和第四时刻向第二通信装置发送SRS。对应的,第二通信装置基于下行参考信号端口在第三时刻和第四时刻接收SRS。S904: The first communication device sends SRS to the second communication device at the third time and the fourth time based on antenna ports 0 and 1. Correspondingly, the second communication device receives SRS at the third time and the fourth time based on the downlink reference signal port.
关于S904的具体实现,可对应参考前述实施例中S403或S503的相关介绍,在此不做赘述。Regarding the specific implementation of S904, reference may be made to the relevant introduction of S403 or S503 in the aforementioned embodiments, and will not be elaborated here.
S905:第二通信装置基于下行参考信号端口接收的第三时刻和第四时刻的SRS,计算上行信道的相位差信息。S905: The second communication device calculates the phase difference information of the uplink channel based on the SRS at the third time and the fourth time received by the downlink reference signal port.
可以理解的,第二通信装置可分别基于第三时刻和第四时刻的SRS,对天线端口0和天线端口1对应的上行信道进行信道估计,并且对同一时刻的两个端口的信道估计结果进行拼接,对应的,计算对拼接后的信道在第三时刻和第四时刻的相位差信息。关于计算该相位差信息的具体实现可对应参考前述实施例中S603的相关介绍,在此不做赘述。It can be understood that the second communication device can perform channel estimation on the uplink channels corresponding to antenna port 0 and antenna port 1 based on the SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment, respectively, and splice the channel estimation results of the two ports at the same moment, and correspondingly calculate the phase difference information of the spliced channel at the third moment and the fourth moment. The specific implementation of calculating the phase difference information can be referred to the relevant introduction of S603 in the aforementioned embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
S906:第二通信装置基于上述上行信道的相位差信息和上述相位差反馈量,确定并补偿SRS随机相位的差。S906: The second communication device determines and compensates for the SRS random phase difference based on the phase difference information of the uplink channel and the phase difference feedback amount.
关于S906的具体实现,可对应参考前述实施例中S607的相关介绍,在此不做赘述。For the specific implementation of S906, reference may be made to the relevant introduction of S607 in the aforementioned embodiment, which will not be elaborated here.
示例性的,本实施例所示出的相位差反馈量的计算公式仅是一种示例,实际上还可以适应性地选择前述实施例中的任意一种计算公式。Exemplarily, the calculation formula for the phase difference feedback amount shown in this embodiment is only an example, and in fact, any calculation formula in the aforementioned embodiments can be adaptively selected.
可以理解的,在本实施例中,适用于终端设备的多个天线端口分为多个组(每个组对应一个第一端口集合),每个组内的天线端口之间具有相干能力时,可以用一个相位差反馈量来解决一组天线端口共同的随机相位差,相比于每个天线端口反馈一个相位差反馈量,可以实现共享相位差反馈量,反馈开销较低。It can be understood that in this embodiment, multiple antenna ports applicable to the terminal device are divided into multiple groups (each group corresponds to a first port set). When the antenna ports in each group have coherence capability, a phase difference feedback amount can be used to solve the common random phase difference of a group of antenna ports. Compared with feeding back a phase difference feedback amount for each antenna port, shared phase difference feedback amount can be achieved, and the feedback overhead is lower.
下面将介绍本申请的装置实施例。The device embodiments of the present application will be introduced below.
本申请根据上述方法实施例对通信装置进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。下面将结合图10至图12详细描述本申请实施例的通信装置。The present application divides the functional modules of the communication device according to the above method embodiment. For example, each functional module can be divided according to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the present application is schematic and is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation. The communication device of the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail below in conjunction with Figures 10 to 12.
图10是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图,如图10所示,该通信装置包括处理单元1003、发送单元1001和接收单元1002。FIG10 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG10 , the communication device includes a processing unit 1003 , a sending unit 1001 and a receiving unit 1002 .
在本申请的一些实施例中,该通信装置可以是上文示出的第一通信装置。即图10所示的通信装置可以用于执行上文方法实施例中由第一通信装置执行的步骤或功能等。示例性的,该第一通信装置可以是波束成型发射设备或芯片等,本申请实施例对此不作限定。In some embodiments of the present application, the communication device may be the first communication device shown above. That is, the communication device shown in FIG. 10 may be used to execute the steps or functions performed by the first communication device in the above method embodiment. Exemplarily, the first communication device may be a beamforming transmission device or chip, etc., which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
接收单元1002,用于接收来自该第二通信装置的下行参考信号;The receiving unit 1002 is configured to receive a downlink reference signal from the second communication device;
发送单元1001,用于向第二通信装置发送反馈信息(或相位差反馈量)。The sending unit 1001 is configured to send feedback information (or a phase difference feedback amount) to a second communication device.
可选的,处理单元1003,用于生成反馈信息(或相位差反馈量)。又如该处理单元1003,还用于生成 第一指示信息。又如该处理单元1003,还用于处理下行参考信号,获得估计的信道。Optionally, the processing unit 1003 is used to generate feedback information (or phase difference feedback amount). The first indication information. For example, the processing unit 1003 is further configured to process a downlink reference signal to obtain an estimated channel.
可选的,处理单元1003,还用于控制发送单元1001输出反馈信息(或相位差反馈量)。Optionally, the processing unit 1003 is further configured to control the sending unit 1001 to output feedback information (or a phase difference feedback amount).
可选的,处理单元1003,还用于生成SRS。Optionally, the processing unit 1003 is further configured to generate an SRS.
可选的,发送单元1001,还用于向第二通信装置发送SRS。Optionally, the sending unit 1001 is further configured to send an SRS to a second communication device.
可理解,关于该反馈信息、相位差反馈量、下行参考信号、估计的信道、SRS、第一指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例,如图4至图9b所示的方法,这里不再详述。It can be understood that the specific description of the feedback information, phase difference feedback amount, downlink reference signal, estimated channel, SRS, first indication information, etc. can refer to the method embodiments shown above, such as the methods shown in Figures 4 to 9b, and will not be described in detail here.
可理解,本申请实施例示出的收发单元和处理单元的具体说明仅为示例,对于收发单元和处理单元的具体功能或执行的步骤等,可以参考上述方法实施例,这里不再详述。示例性的,该发送单元1001还可以用于执行图6所对应的S604、S606中的发送步骤,接收单元1002还用于执行图6所对应的S601、S602中的接收步骤,处理单元1003还可以用于执行图6所对应的S603。It is understandable that the specific description of the transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiment of the present application is only an example. For the specific functions or execution steps of the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference can be made to the above method embodiment, which will not be described in detail here. Exemplarily, the sending unit 1001 can also be used to execute the sending steps in S604 and S606 corresponding to Figure 6, the receiving unit 1002 is also used to execute the receiving steps in S601 and S602 corresponding to Figure 6, and the processing unit 1003 can also be used to execute S603 corresponding to Figure 6.
复用图10,在本申请的另一些实施例中,该通信装置可以是上文示出的第二通信装置。即图10所示的通信装置可以用于执行上文方法实施例中由第二通信装置执行的步骤或功能等。示例性的,该第二通信装置可以是波束成型接收设备或芯片等,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Reusing Figure 10, in some other embodiments of the present application, the communication device may be the second communication device shown above. That is, the communication device shown in Figure 10 may be used to execute the steps or functions performed by the second communication device in the above method embodiment. Exemplarily, the second communication device may be a beamforming receiving device or chip, etc., which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
发送单元1001,用于向第一通信装置发送下行参考信号;The sending unit 1001 is configured to send a downlink reference signal to a first communication device;
接收单元1002,用于接收来自第一通信装置的反馈信息(或相位差反馈量);The receiving unit 1002 is configured to receive feedback information (or a phase difference feedback amount) from a first communication device;
可选的,处理单元1003,用于生成第一指示信息。Optionally, the processing unit 1003 is used to generate first indication information.
可选的,处理单元1003,还用于生成上行信道的相位差信息。Optionally, the processing unit 1003 is further configured to generate phase difference information of an uplink channel.
可选的,接收单元1002,还用于接收来自第一通信装置的SRS,以及接收来自第一通信装置的反馈信息(或相位差反馈量)。Optionally, the receiving unit 1002 is further configured to receive an SRS from the first communication device, and receive feedback information (or a phase difference feedback amount) from the first communication device.
可选的,处理单元1003,还用于处理SRS。例如,该处理单元1003,可以根据第三时刻和第四时刻的SRS进行信道估计,确定上述相位差反馈量。Optionally, the processing unit 1003 is further configured to process the SRS. For example, the processing unit 1003 may perform channel estimation according to the SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment to determine the above-mentioned phase difference feedback amount.
可选的,处理单元1003,还用于确定和补偿SRS随机相位的差等。Optionally, the processing unit 1003 is further configured to determine and compensate for a difference in a random phase of an SRS.
可理解,关于该反馈信息、相位差反馈量、上行信道的相位差信息、SRS随机相位、下行参考信号、估计的信道、SRS、第一指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例,如图4至图9b所示的方法,这里不再详述。It can be understood that the specific description of the feedback information, phase difference feedback amount, phase difference information of the uplink channel, SRS random phase, downlink reference signal, estimated channel, SRS, first indication information, etc. can refer to the method embodiments shown above, such as the methods shown in Figures 4 to 9b, and will not be described in detail here.
可理解,本申请实施例示出的收发单元和处理单元的具体说明仅为示例,对于收发单元和处理单元的具体功能或执行的步骤等,可以参考上述方法实施例,这里不再详述。示例性的,接收单元1002还可以用于执行图6所对应的S604、S606中的接收步骤;处理单元1003还可以用于执行图6所对应的S605、S607,以及发送单元1001还用于执行图6所对应的S601、S602中的发送步骤。It is understandable that the specific description of the transceiver unit and the processing unit shown in the embodiment of the present application is only an example. For the specific functions or execution steps of the transceiver unit and the processing unit, reference can be made to the above method embodiment, which will not be described in detail here. Exemplarily, the receiving unit 1002 can also be used to execute the receiving steps in S604 and S606 corresponding to Figure 6; the processing unit 1003 can also be used to execute S605 and S607 corresponding to Figure 6, and the sending unit 1001 is also used to execute the sending steps in S601 and S602 corresponding to Figure 6.
以上介绍了本申请实施例的第一通信装置和第二通信装置,以下介绍所述第一通信装置和第二通信装置可能的产品形态。应理解,但凡具备上述图10所述的第一通信装置的功能的任何形态的产品,或者,但凡具备上述图10所述的第二通信装置的功能的任何形态的产品,都落入本申请实施例的保护范围。还应理解,以下介绍仅为举例,不限制本申请实施例的第一通信装置和第二通信装置的产品形态仅限于此。The first communication device and the second communication device of the embodiment of the present application are introduced above, and the possible product forms of the first communication device and the second communication device are introduced below. It should be understood that any product having the functions of the first communication device described in FIG. 10 above, or any product having the functions of the second communication device described in FIG. 10 above, falls within the protection scope of the embodiment of the present application. It should also be understood that the following introduction is only an example, and does not limit the product forms of the first communication device and the second communication device of the embodiment of the present application to this.
图10所示的通信装置中,处理单元1003可以是一个或多个处理器,发送单元1001可以是发送器,接收单元1002可以是接收器,或者发送单元1001和接收单元1002集成于一个器件,例如收发器。或者,处理单元1003可以是一个或多个处理器(或者处理单元1003可以是一个或多个逻辑电路),发送单元1001可以是输出接口,接收单元1002可以是输入接口,或者发送单元1001和接收单元1002集成于一个单元,例如输入输出接口。以下将详细说明。In the communication device shown in FIG10 , the processing unit 1003 may be one or more processors, the sending unit 1001 may be a transmitter, the receiving unit 1002 may be a receiver, or the sending unit 1001 and the receiving unit 1002 may be integrated into one device, such as a transceiver. Alternatively, the processing unit 1003 may be one or more processors (or the processing unit 1003 may be one or more logic circuits), the sending unit 1001 may be an output interface, the receiving unit 1002 may be an input interface, or the sending unit 1001 and the receiving unit 1002 may be integrated into one unit, such as an input-output interface. This will be described in detail below.
在一种可能的实现方式中,图10所示的通信装置中,处理单元1003可以是一个或多个处理器,发送单元1001和接收单元1002可以集成于收发器。本申请实施例中,处理器和收发器可以被耦合等,对于处理器和收发器的连接方式,本申请实施例不作限定。In a possible implementation, in the communication device shown in Figure 10, the processing unit 1003 may be one or more processors, and the sending unit 1001 and the receiving unit 1002 may be integrated into a transceiver. In the embodiment of the present application, the processor and the transceiver may be coupled, etc., and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the connection method between the processor and the transceiver.
如图11所示,该通信装置1100包括一个或多个处理器1102和收发器1101。As shown in FIG. 11 , the communication device 1100 includes one or more processors 1102 and a transceiver 1101 .
示例性的,当该通信装置用于执行上述第一通信装置执行的步骤或方法或功能时,收发器1101,用于向第二通信装置发送反馈信息,以及接收来自该第二通信装置的下行参考信号。可选的,处理器1102,用于根据该下行参考信号进行信道估计。可选的,收发器1101,还用于向第二通信装置发送SRS,以及第一指示信息等。Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to execute the steps, methods or functions executed by the first communication device, the transceiver 1101 is used to send feedback information to the second communication device and receive a downlink reference signal from the second communication device. Optionally, the processor 1102 is used to perform channel estimation according to the downlink reference signal. Optionally, the transceiver 1101 is also used to send an SRS and first indication information to the second communication device.
示例性的,当该通信装置用于执行上述第二通信装置执行的步骤或方法或功能时,收发器1101,用于向该第一通信装置发送下行参考信号,以及接收来自第一通信装置的反馈信息。可选的,处理器1102,用 于生成第一指示信息、上行信道的相位差信息等。可选的,收发器1101,还用于接收来自第一通信装置的SRS,以及第一指示信息等。可选的,处理器1102,还用于处理SRS。Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to execute the steps, methods or functions executed by the second communication device, the transceiver 1101 is used to send a downlink reference signal to the first communication device and receive feedback information from the first communication device. For generating the first indication information, the phase difference information of the uplink channel, etc. Optionally, the transceiver 1101 is further configured to receive the SRS from the first communication device, and the first indication information, etc. Optionally, the processor 1102 is further configured to process the SRS.
可理解,关于该反馈信息、相位差反馈量、上行信道的相位差信息、SRS随机相位、下行参考信号、估计的信道、SRS、第一指示信息等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例,如图4至图9b所示的方法,这里不再详述。It can be understood that the specific description of the feedback information, phase difference feedback amount, phase difference information of the uplink channel, SRS random phase, downlink reference signal, estimated channel, SRS, first indication information, etc. can refer to the method embodiments shown above, such as the methods shown in Figures 4 to 9b, and will not be described in detail here.
可理解,对于处理器和收发器的具体说明还可以参考图10所示的处理单元、发送单元和接收单元的介绍,这里不再赘述。It can be understood that for the specific description of the processor and the transceiver, reference can also be made to the introduction of the processing unit, the sending unit and the receiving unit shown in FIG. 10 , which will not be repeated here.
在图11所示的通信装置的各个实现方式中,收发器可以包括接收机和发射机,该接收机用于执行接收的功能(或操作),该发射机用于执行发射的功能(或操作)。以及收发器用于通过传输介质和其他设备/装置进行通信。In various implementations of the communication device shown in FIG11 , the transceiver may include a receiver and a transmitter, wherein the receiver is used to perform a receiving function (or operation) and the transmitter is used to perform a transmitting function (or operation). The transceiver is used to communicate with other devices/devices via a transmission medium.
可选的,通信装置1100还可以包括一个或多个存储器1103,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。存储器1103和处理器1102耦合。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式,用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。处理器1102可能和存储器1103协同操作。处理器1102可可以执行存储器1103中存储的程序指令。可选的,上述一个或多个存储器中的至少一个可以包括于处理器中。Optionally, the communication device 1100 may also include one or more memories 1103 for storing program instructions and/or data. The memory 1103 is coupled to the processor 1102. The coupling in the embodiment of the present application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules. The processor 1102 may operate in conjunction with the memory 1103. The processor 1102 may execute program instructions stored in the memory 1103. Optionally, at least one of the one or more memories may be included in the processor.
本申请实施例中不限定上述收发器1101、处理器1102以及存储器1103之间的具体连接介质。本申请实施例在图11中以存储器1103、处理器1102以及收发器1101之间通过总线1104连接,总线在图11中以粗线表示,其它部件之间的连接方式,仅是进行示意性说明,并不引以为限。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图11中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。The specific connection medium between the above-mentioned transceiver 1101, processor 1102 and memory 1103 is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. In FIG. 11, the memory 1103, processor 1102 and transceiver 1101 are connected through a bus 1104. The bus is represented by a bold line in FIG. 11. The connection mode between other components is only for schematic illustration and is not limited thereto. The bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, etc. For ease of representation, only one bold line is used in FIG. 11, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
在本申请实施例中,处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器、专用集成电路、现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等,可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成等。In the embodiments of the present application, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application-specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, a discrete hardware component, etc., and may implement or execute the methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor, etc. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed by a hardware processor, or may be executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor, etc.
本申请实施例中,存储器可包括但不限于硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive,SSD)等非易失性存储器,随机存储记忆体(Random Access Memory,RAM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable Programmable ROM,EPROM)、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)或便携式只读存储器(Compact Disc Read-Only Memory,CD-ROM)等等。存储器是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的程序代码,并能够由计算机(如本申请示出的通信装置等)读和/或写的任何存储介质,但不限于此。本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是电路或者其它任意能够实现存储功能的装置,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。In the embodiments of the present application, the memory may include, but is not limited to, non-volatile memories such as hard disk drive (HDD) or solid-state drive (SSD), random access memory (RAM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), read-only memory (ROM) or portable read-only memory (CD-ROM), etc. The memory is any storage medium that can be used to carry or store program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and can be read and/or written by a computer (such as the communication device shown in the present application), but is not limited to this. The memory in the embodiments of the present application can also be a circuit or any other device that can realize a storage function, which is used to store program instructions and/or data.
处理器1102主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个通信装置进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。存储器1103主要用于存储软件程序和数据。收发器1101可以包括控制电路和天线,控制电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。The processor 1102 is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire communication device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program. The memory 1103 is mainly used to store the software program and data. The transceiver 1101 may include a control circuit and an antenna. The control circuit is mainly used to convert the baseband signal and the radio frequency signal and process the radio frequency signal. The antenna is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. The input and output devices, such as a touch screen, a display screen, a keyboard, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by the user and output data to the user.
当通信装置开机后,处理器1102可以读取存储器1103中的软件程序,解释并执行软件程序的指令,处理软件程序的数据。当需要通过无线发送数据时,处理器1102对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到通信装置时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器1102,处理器1102将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。When the communication device is turned on, the processor 1102 can read the software program in the memory 1103, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program. When data needs to be sent wirelessly, the processor 1102 performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. The radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and then sends the radio frequency signal outward in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. When data is sent to the communication device, the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor 1102. The processor 1102 converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
在另一种实现中,所述的射频电路和天线可以独立于进行基带处理的处理器而设置,例如在分布式场景中,射频电路和天线可以与独立于通信装置,呈拉远式的布置。In another implementation, the RF circuit and antenna may be arranged independently of the processor performing baseband processing. For example, in a distributed scenario, the RF circuit and antenna may be arranged independently of the communication device in a remote manner.
可理解,本申请实施例示出的通信装置还可以具有比图11更多的元器件等,本申请实施例对此不作限定。以上所示的处理器和收发器所执行的方法仅为示例,对于该处理器和收发器具体所执行的步骤可参照上文介绍的方法。It is understandable that the communication device shown in the embodiment of the present application may also have more components than those in FIG11, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this. The method performed by the processor and transceiver shown above is only an example, and the specific steps performed by the processor and transceiver can refer to the method described above.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,图10所示的通信装置中,处理单元1003可以是一个或多个逻辑电路,发 送单元1001可以是输出接口,接收单元1002,可以是输入接口。或者,该发送单元1001和该接收单元1002可以集成于一个单元,例如输入输出接口等。该输入输出接口,又或者称为通信接口,或者接口电路,或接口等等。如图12所示,图12所示的通信装置包括逻辑电路1201和接口1202。即上述处理单元801可以用逻辑电路1201实现,发送单元1001和接收单元1002可以用接口1202实现。其中,该逻辑电路1201可以为芯片、处理电路、集成电路或片上系统(system on chip,SoC)芯片等,接口1202可以为通信接口、输入输出接口、管脚等。示例性的,图12是以上述通信装置为芯片为例示出的,该芯片包括逻辑电路1201和接口1202。In another possible implementation, in the communication device shown in FIG. 10, the processing unit 1003 may be one or more logic circuits. The sending unit 1001 may be an output interface, and the receiving unit 1002 may be an input interface. Alternatively, the sending unit 1001 and the receiving unit 1002 may be integrated into one unit, such as an input-output interface. The input-output interface may also be called a communication interface, or an interface circuit, or an interface, etc. As shown in FIG12 , the communication device shown in FIG12 includes a logic circuit 1201 and an interface 1202. That is, the above-mentioned processing unit 801 may be implemented with a logic circuit 1201, and the sending unit 1001 and the receiving unit 1002 may be implemented with an interface 1202. Among them, the logic circuit 1201 may be a chip, a processing circuit, an integrated circuit or a system on chip (SoC) chip, etc., and the interface 1202 may be a communication interface, an input-output interface, a pin, etc. Exemplarily, FIG12 is shown by taking the above-mentioned communication device as a chip as an example, and the chip includes a logic circuit 1201 and an interface 1202.
本申请实施例中,逻辑电路和接口还可以相互耦合。对于逻辑电路和接口的具体连接方式,本申请实施例不作限定。In the embodiment of the present application, the logic circuit and the interface may also be coupled to each other. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific connection method between the logic circuit and the interface.
示例性的,当通信装置用于执行上述第一通信装置执行的方法或功能或步骤时,接口1202,用于输出反馈信息,以及输入下行参考信号。Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to execute the method, function or step executed by the first communication device, the interface 1202 is used to output feedback information and input a downlink reference signal.
可选的,逻辑电路1201,用于根据该下行参考信号进行信道估计等。Optionally, the logic circuit 1201 is used to perform channel estimation etc. according to the downlink reference signal.
可选的,逻辑电路1201,还用于生成SRS,接口1202,还用于输出SRS。Optionally, the logic circuit 1201 is further used to generate an SRS, and the interface 1202 is further used to output the SRS.
示例性的,当通信装置用于执行上述第二通信装置执行的方法或功能或步骤时,接口1202,用于输入反馈信息,以及输出下行参考信号。可选的,逻辑电路1201,用于生成下行参考信号。可选的,接口1202,还用于输入反馈信息,逻辑电路1201,还用于处理该反馈信息。可选的,接口1202,还用于输入SRS,逻辑电路1201,还用于处理该SRS(如根据该SRS进行信道估计等)。Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to execute the method, function or step executed by the second communication device, the interface 1202 is used to input feedback information and output a downlink reference signal. Optionally, the logic circuit 1201 is used to generate a downlink reference signal. Optionally, the interface 1202 is also used to input feedback information, and the logic circuit 1201 is also used to process the feedback information. Optionally, the interface 1202 is also used to input SRS, and the logic circuit 1201 is also used to process the SRS (such as performing channel estimation based on the SRS, etc.).
可理解,本申请实施例示出的通信装置可以采用硬件的形式实现本申请实施例提供的方法,也可以采用软件的形式实现本申请实施例提供的方法等,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It can be understood that the communication device shown in the embodiment of the present application can implement the method provided in the embodiment of the present application in the form of hardware, or can implement the method provided in the embodiment of the present application in the form of software, etc., and the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
可理解,关于该反馈信息、相位差反馈量、上行信道的相位差信息、SRS随机相位、下行参考信号、估计的信道、SRS等的具体说明可以参考上文所示的方法实施例,如图4至图9b所示的方法,这里不再详述。It can be understood that the specific description of the feedback information, phase difference feedback amount, phase difference information of the uplink channel, SRS random phase, downlink reference signal, estimated channel, SRS, etc. can refer to the method embodiments shown above, such as the methods shown in Figures 4 to 9b, and will not be described in detail here.
对于图12所示的各个实施例的具体实现方式,还可以参考上述各个实施例,这里不再详述。For the specific implementation methods of each embodiment shown in FIG. 12 , reference may also be made to the above embodiments, which will not be described in detail here.
此外,本申请还提供一种计算机程序,该计算机程序用于实现本申请提供的方法中由第一通信装置执行的操作和/或处理。In addition, the present application also provides a computer program, which is used to implement the operations and/or processing performed by the first communication device in the method provided by the present application.
本申请还提供一种计算机程序,该计算机程序用于实现本申请提供的方法中由第二通信装置执行的操作和/或处理。The present application also provides a computer program, which is used to implement the operations and/or processing performed by the second communication device in the method provided by the present application.
本申请还提供一种计算机存储介质,所述计算机存储介质中存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序包括程序指令,在所述程序指令被处理器执行的情况下,所述处理器执行本申请提供的方法中由第一通信装置执行的操作和/或处理。The present application also provides a computer storage medium, in which a computer program is stored. The computer program includes program instructions. When the program instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes the operations and/or processing performed by the first communication device in the method provided in the present application.
本申请还提供一种计算机存储介质,所述计算机存储介质中存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序包括程序指令,在所述程序指令被处理器执行的情况下,所述处理器执行本申请提供的方法中由第二通信装置执行的操作和/或处理。The present application also provides a computer storage medium, in which a computer program is stored. The computer program includes program instructions. When the program instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes the operations and/or processing performed by the second communication device in the method provided in the present application.
本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或计算机代码,当所述计算机程序或所述计算机代码在计算机上运行时,使得本申请提供的方法中由第一通信装置执行的操作和/或处理被执行。The present application also provides a computer program product, which includes a computer program or a computer code. When the computer program or the computer code runs on a computer, the operations and/or processing performed by the first communication device in the method provided by the present application are executed.
本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或计算机代码,当所述计算机程序或所述计算机代码在计算机上运行时,使得本申请提供的方法中由第二通信装置执行的操作和/或处理被执行。The present application also provides a computer program product, which includes a computer program or a computer code. When the computer program or the computer code runs on a computer, the operations and/or processing performed by the second communication device in the method provided by the present application are executed.
本申请还提供一种通信系统,包括终端设备和网络设备,该终端设备和该网络设备可以用于执行前述任一实施例中的方法。The present application also provides a communication system, including a terminal device and a network device, wherein the terminal device and the network device can be used to execute the method in any of the aforementioned embodiments.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另外,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口、装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,也可以是电的,机械的或其它的形式连接。In the several embodiments provided in the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. In addition, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, or it can be an electrical, mechanical or other form of connection.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本申请实施例提供的方案的技术效果。 The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the technical effects of the solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以是两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分,或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个可读存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的可读存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。 If the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a readable storage medium, including a number of instructions to enable a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned readable storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes.

Claims (32)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    基于至少一个第一端口集合,分别在第一时刻和第二时刻接收下行参考信号;所述第一端口集合包括一个或多个天线端口;Based on at least one first port set, receiving a downlink reference signal at a first time and a second time, respectively; the first port set includes one or more antenna ports;
    发送反馈信息,所述反馈信息用于指示多个相位差反馈量;每个所述相位差反馈量对应所述至少一个第一端口集合中的一个;所述相位差反馈量用于指示其对应的所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息。Send feedback information, where the feedback information is used to indicate multiple phase difference feedback amounts; each of the phase difference feedback amounts corresponds to one of the at least one first port set; and the phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signal received by the corresponding antenna port in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述相位差反馈量用于指示其对应的所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息包括如下至少一项:The method according to claim 1, characterized in that the phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port in the first port set corresponding to it at the first time and the second time, including at least one of the following:
    所述相位差反馈量用于指示其对应的所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息;所述下行参考信号之间的相位差信息是所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号的互相关的相位信息;The phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the corresponding antenna port in the first port set at the first time and the second time; the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals is the cross-correlation phase information of the downlink reference signals received by the antenna port in the first port set at the first time and the second time;
    所述相位差反馈量用于指示其对应的所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻的信道之间的相位差信息;所述信道之间的相位差信息是所述第一时刻的信道与所述第二时刻的信道的互相关的相位信息;所述第一时刻的信道是基于所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻接收的下行参考信号确定的,所述第二时刻的信道是基于所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号确定的。The phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the channels of the corresponding antenna port in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment; the phase difference information between the channels is the phase information of the cross-correlation between the channel at the first moment and the channel at the second moment; the channel at the first moment is determined based on the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port in the first port set at the first moment, and the channel at the second moment is determined based on the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port in the first port set at the second moment.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    基于所述至少一个第一端口集合,在第三时刻和第四时刻发送SRS;所述第一时刻与所述第三时刻的时间间隔为第一时间差,所述第二时刻与所述第四时刻的时间间隔为第二时间差;所述相位差反馈量对应一个所述第三时刻和一个所述第四时刻。Based on the at least one first port set, an SRS is sent at a third moment and a fourth moment; the time interval between the first moment and the third moment is a first time difference, and the time interval between the second moment and the fourth moment is a second time difference; the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to one third moment and one fourth moment.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一时间差小于第一阈值,所述第二时间差小于所述第一阈值;The method according to claim 3, characterized in that the first time difference is less than a first threshold, and the second time difference is less than the first threshold;
    或者,所述第一时间差小于或等于所述第一阈值,所述第二时间差小于或等于所述第一阈值。Alternatively, the first time difference is less than or equal to the first threshold, and the second time difference is less than or equal to the first threshold.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一阈值满足如下任意一项:The method according to claim 4, characterized in that the first threshold satisfies any one of the following:
    所述第一阈值等于第三时间差的四分之一,所述第三时间差为所述第三时刻与所述第四时刻的时间间隔;The first threshold is equal to one quarter of the third time difference, and the third time difference is the time interval between the third moment and the fourth moment;
    所述第一阈值等于所述第三时间差的五分之一;The first threshold is equal to one fifth of the third time difference;
    所述第一阈值等于所述第三时间差的八分之一;The first threshold is equal to one eighth of the third time difference;
    所述第一阈值等于5个时隙的时间;The first threshold is equal to a time of 5 time slots;
    所述第一阈值等于2个时隙的时间;The first threshold is equal to the time of 2 time slots;
    所述第一阈值等于1个时隙的时间。The first threshold is equal to the time of 1 time slot.
  6. 根据权利要求1至5中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述相位差反馈量用于补偿在所述第三时刻发送的SRS对应的随机相位与在所述第四时刻发送的SRS对应的随机相位之间的差。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5 is characterized in that the phase difference feedback amount is used to compensate for the difference between the random phase corresponding to the SRS sent at the third moment and the random phase corresponding to the SRS sent at the fourth moment.
  7. 根据权利要求1至6中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述相位差反馈量对应一个第二端口集合;所述第二端口集合包括一个或多个下行参考信号端口;The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, characterized in that the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to a second port set; the second port set includes one or more downlink reference signal ports;
    所述相位差反馈量对应一个第一频域位置集合或对应一个第一频域基底集合;所述第一频域位置集合包括一个或多个频域位置,所述第一频域基底集合包括一个或多个频域基底。The phase difference feedback amount corresponds to a first frequency domain position set or corresponds to a first frequency domain basis set; the first frequency domain position set includes one or more frequency domain positions, and the first frequency domain basis set includes one or more frequency domain basis.
  8. 根据权利要求1至7中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个相位差反馈量中的任意两个所述相位差反馈量满足如下至少一项:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, characterized in that any two of the multiple phase difference feedback amounts satisfy at least one of the following:
    所述任意两个所述相位差反馈量对应的所述第一端口集合不同; The first port sets corresponding to any two of the phase difference feedback amounts are different;
    所述任意两个所述相位差反馈量对应的第二端口集合不同;The second port sets corresponding to any two of the phase difference feedback quantities are different;
    所述任意两个所述相位差反馈量对应的第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合不同。The first frequency domain position sets or first frequency domain basis sets corresponding to any two of the phase difference feedback amounts are different.
  9. 根据权利要求1至8中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一时刻的下行参考信号对应的发送天线端口集合包含第二端口集合,所述第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的发送天线端口集合包含所述第二端口集合;The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, characterized in that the transmit antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment includes the second port set, and the transmit antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment includes the second port set;
    所述第一时刻的下行参考信号对应的频域带宽包含第一频域位置集合对应的带宽或第一频域基底集合对应的带宽,所述第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的频域带宽包含所述第一频域位置集合对应的带宽或所述第一频域基底集合对应的带宽;The frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment includes a bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or a bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set, and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment includes a bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or a bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set;
    所述第三时刻的SRS对应的发送天线端口集合包含所述第一端口集合,所述第四时刻的SRS对应的发送天线端口集合包含所述第一端口集合;The transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the third moment includes the first port set, and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment includes the first port set;
    所述第三时刻的SRS对应的频域带宽包含所述第一频域位置集合对应的带宽或所述第一频域基底集合对应的带宽,所述第四时刻的SRS对应的频域带宽包含所述第一频域位置集合对应的带宽或所述第一频域基底集合对应的带宽。The frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the third moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set, and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set.
  10. 根据权利要求1至9中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    接收第一指示信息;或者,发送所述第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息用于指示所述相位差反馈量对应的所述第一端口集合、第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合中的任意一项或多项。Receive first indication information; or send the first indication information; the first indication information is used to indicate any one or more of the first port set, the second port set, the first frequency domain position set or the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount.
  11. 根据权利要求1至9中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    基于SRS端口信息,确定所述第一端口集合;所述SRS端口信息为所述第三时刻的SRS对应的发送天线端口集合和所述第四时刻的SRS对应的发送天线端口集合的信息。The first port set is determined based on SRS port information; the SRS port information is information about a transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and a transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment.
  12. 根据权利要求1至9任意一项、或11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9 or 11, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    基于下行参考信号端口信息,确定所述第二端口集合;所述下行参考信号端口信息为所述第一时刻的下行参考信号对应的发送天线端口集合和所述第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的发送天线端口集合的信息;Determine the second port set based on downlink reference signal port information; the downlink reference signal port information is information of a transmit antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and a transmit antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment;
    基于第二频域位置集合和第三频域位置集合,确定所述第一频域位置集合;所述第二频域位置集合为所述第三时刻和所述第四时刻的SRS对应的一个或多个频域位置,所述第三频域位置集合为所述第一时刻和所述第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的一个或多个频域位置;Determine the first frequency domain position set based on the second frequency domain position set and the third frequency domain position set; the second frequency domain position set is one or more frequency domain positions corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment, and the third frequency domain position set is one or more frequency domain positions corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the second moment;
    或者,基于第二频域基底集合和第三频域基底集合,确定所述第一频域基底集合;所述第二频域基底集合为所述第三时刻和所述第四时刻的SRS对应的一个或多个频域基底,所述第三频域基底集合为所述第一时刻和所述第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的一个或多个频域基底。Alternatively, the first frequency domain basis set is determined based on the second frequency domain basis set and the third frequency domain basis set; the second frequency domain basis set is one or more frequency domain basis sets corresponding to the SRS at the third moment and the fourth moment, and the third frequency domain basis set is one or more frequency domain basis sets corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment and the second moment.
  13. 根据权利要求1至12中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一端口集合包含多个天线端口的情况下,所述第一端口集合中的任意两个天线端口具有相干能力;The method according to any one of claims 1 to 12, characterized in that, when the first port set includes multiple antenna ports, any two antenna ports in the first port set have coherence capability;
    在第二端口集合包含多个下行参考信号端口的情况下,所述第二端口集合中的任意两个下行参考信号端口具有相干能力。In the case where the second port set includes a plurality of downlink reference signal ports, any two downlink reference signal ports in the second port set have coherence capability.
  14. 根据权利要求1至13中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述下行参考信号包括信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS、跟踪参考信号TRS、相位跟踪参考信号PT-RS以及解调参考信号DM-RS中的任意一项。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 13 is characterized in that the downlink reference signal includes any one of a channel state information reference signal CSI-RS, a tracking reference signal TRS, a phase tracking reference signal PT-RS and a demodulation reference signal DM-RS.
  15. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    基于至少一个第二端口集合,分别在第一时刻和第二时刻发送下行参考信号;所述第二端口集合包含一个或多个下行参考信号端口;Based on at least one second port set, sending a downlink reference signal at a first time and a second time, respectively; the second port set includes one or more downlink reference signal ports;
    接收反馈信息,所述反馈信息用于指示多个相位差反馈量;所述相位差反馈量用于指示其对应的第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息;所述第一端口集合包含一个或多个天线端口;每个所述相位差反馈量对应所述至少一个第一端口集合中的一个。Receive feedback information, where the feedback information is used to indicate multiple phase difference feedback amounts; the phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port in the corresponding first port set at the first moment and the second moment; the first port set includes one or more antenna ports; each of the phase difference feedback amounts corresponds to one of the at least one first port set.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述相位差反馈量用于指示其对应的第一端口集合中 的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息包括如下至少一项:The method according to claim 15, characterized in that the phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the corresponding first port set The phase difference information between the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port at the first time and the second time includes at least one of the following:
    所述相位差反馈量用于指示其对应的所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号之间的相位差信息;所述下行参考信号之间的相位差信息是所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号的互相关的相位信息;The phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals received by the corresponding antenna port in the first port set at the first time and the second time; the phase difference information between the downlink reference signals is the cross-correlation phase information of the downlink reference signals received by the antenna port in the first port set at the first time and the second time;
    所述相位差反馈量用于指示其对应的所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻与所述第二时刻的信道之间的相位差信息;所述信道之间的相位差信息是所述第一时刻的信道与所述第二时刻的信道的互相关的相位信息;所述第一时刻的信道是基于所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第一时刻接收的下行参考信号确定的,所述第二时刻的信道是基于所述第一端口集合中的天线端口在所述第二时刻接收的下行参考信号确定的。The phase difference feedback amount is used to indicate the phase difference information between the channels of the corresponding antenna port in the first port set at the first moment and the second moment; the phase difference information between the channels is the phase information of the cross-correlation between the channel at the first moment and the channel at the second moment; the channel at the first moment is determined based on the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port in the first port set at the first moment, and the channel at the second moment is determined based on the downlink reference signal received by the antenna port in the first port set at the second moment.
  17. 根据权利要求15或16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 15 or 16, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    在第三时刻和第四时刻接收SRS;所述第一时刻与所述第三时刻的时间间隔为第一时间差,所述第二时刻与所述第四时刻的时间间隔为第二时间差;所述相位差反馈量对应一个所述第三时刻和一个所述第四时刻。SRS is received at a third moment and a fourth moment; the time interval between the first moment and the third moment is a first time difference, and the time interval between the second moment and the fourth moment is a second time difference; the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to one third moment and one fourth moment.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一时间差小于第一阈值,所述第二时间差小于所述第一阈值;The method according to claim 17, characterized in that the first time difference is less than a first threshold, and the second time difference is less than the first threshold;
    或者,所述第一时间差小于或等于所述第一阈值,所述第二时间差小于或等于所述第一阈值。Alternatively, the first time difference is less than or equal to the first threshold, and the second time difference is less than or equal to the first threshold.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一阈值满足如下任意一项:The method according to claim 18, characterized in that the first threshold satisfies any one of the following:
    所述第一阈值等于第三时间差的四分之一,所述第三时间差为所述第三时刻与所述第四时刻的时间间隔;The first threshold is equal to one quarter of the third time difference, and the third time difference is the time interval between the third moment and the fourth moment;
    所述第一阈值等于所述第三时间差的五分之一;The first threshold is equal to one fifth of the third time difference;
    所述第一阈值等于所述第三时间差的八分之一;The first threshold is equal to one eighth of the third time difference;
    所述第一阈值等于5个时隙的时间;The first threshold is equal to a time of 5 time slots;
    所述第一阈值等于2个时隙的时间;The first threshold is equal to the time of 2 time slots;
    所述第一阈值等于1个时隙的时间。The first threshold is equal to the time of 1 time slot.
  20. 根据权利要求15至19中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述相位差反馈量用于补偿在所述第三时刻接收的SRS对应的随机相位与在所述第四时刻接收的SRS对应的随机相位之间的差。The method according to any one of claims 15 to 19 is characterized in that the phase difference feedback amount is used to compensate for the difference between the random phase corresponding to the SRS received at the third moment and the random phase corresponding to the SRS received at the fourth moment.
  21. 根据权利要求15至20中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述相位差反馈量对应所述至少一个第二端口集合中的一个第二端口集合;The method according to any one of claims 15 to 20, characterized in that the phase difference feedback amount corresponds to a second port set in the at least one second port set;
    所述相位差反馈量对应一个第一频域位置集合或对应一个第一频域基底集合;所述第一频域位置集合包括一个或多个频域位置,所述第一频域基底集合包括一个或多个频域基底。The phase difference feedback amount corresponds to a first frequency domain position set or corresponds to a first frequency domain basis set; the first frequency domain position set includes one or more frequency domain positions, and the first frequency domain basis set includes one or more frequency domain basis.
  22. 根据权利要求15至21中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个相位差反馈量中的任意两个所述相位差反馈量满足如下至少一项:The method according to any one of claims 15 to 21, characterized in that any two of the multiple phase difference feedback quantities satisfy at least one of the following:
    所述任意两个所述相位差反馈量对应的所述第一端口集合不同;The first port sets corresponding to any two of the phase difference feedback amounts are different;
    所述任意两个所述相位差反馈量对应的所述第二端口集合不同;The second port sets corresponding to any two of the phase difference feedback amounts are different;
    所述任意两个所述相位差反馈量对应的第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合不同。The first frequency domain position sets or first frequency domain basis sets corresponding to any two of the phase difference feedback amounts are different.
  23. 根据权利要求15至22中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一时刻的下行参考信号对应的发送天线端口集合包含所述第二端口集合,所述第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的发送天线端口集合包含所述第二端口集合;The method according to any one of claims 15 to 22, characterized in that the transmit antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment includes the second port set, and the transmit antenna port set corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment includes the second port set;
    所述第一时刻的下行参考信号对应的频域带宽包含第一频域位置集合对应的带宽或第一频域基底集合对应的带宽,所述第二时刻的下行参考信号对应的频域带宽包含所述第一频域位置集合对应的带宽或所述第一频域基底集合对应的带宽;The frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the first moment includes a bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or a bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set, and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the downlink reference signal at the second moment includes a bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or a bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set;
    所述第三时刻的SRS对应的发送天线端口集合包含所述第一端口集合,所述第四时刻的SRS对应的 发送天线端口集合包含所述第一端口集合;The transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the third moment includes the first port set, and the transmitting antenna port set corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment includes the first port set. The transmitting antenna port set includes the first port set;
    所述第三时刻的SRS对应的频域带宽包含所述第一频域位置集合对应的带宽或所述第一频域基底集合对应的带宽,所述第四时刻的SRS对应的频域带宽包含所述第一频域位置集合对应的带宽或所述第一频域基底集合对应的带宽。The frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the third moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set, and the frequency domain bandwidth corresponding to the SRS at the fourth moment includes the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain position set or the bandwidth corresponding to the first frequency domain basis set.
  24. 根据权利要求15至23中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:The method according to any one of claims 15 to 23, characterized in that the method comprises:
    发送第一指示信息,或者,接收所述第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息用于指示所述相位差反馈量对应的所述第一端口集合、所述第二端口集合以及第一频域位置集合或第一频域基底集合中的任意一项或多项。Sending first indication information, or receiving the first indication information; the first indication information is used to indicate any one or more of the first port set, the second port set, the first frequency domain position set, or the first frequency domain basis set corresponding to the phase difference feedback amount.
  25. 根据权利要求15至24中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一端口集合包含多个天线端口的情况下,所述第一端口集合中的任意两个天线端口具有相干能力;The method according to any one of claims 15 to 24, characterized in that, when the first port set includes multiple antenna ports, any two antenna ports in the first port set have coherence capability;
    在所述第二端口集合包含多个下行参考信号端口的情况下,所述第二端口集合中的任意两个下行参考信号端口具有相干能力。In the case where the second port set includes a plurality of downlink reference signal ports, any two downlink reference signal ports in the second port set have coherence capability.
  26. 根据权利要求15至25中任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述下行参考信号包括CSI-RS、TRS、PT-RS以及DM-RS中的任意一项。The method according to any one of claims 15 to 25 is characterized in that the downlink reference signal includes any one of CSI-RS, TRS, PT-RS and DM-RS.
  27. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括用于执行如权利要求1至26中任意一项所述方法的单元。A communication device, characterized by comprising a unit for executing the method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 26.
  28. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括存储器和处理器;A communication device, characterized in that the device comprises a memory and a processor;
    所述存储器,用于存储程序;The memory is used to store programs;
    所述处理器,用于执行所述处理器存储的所述程序,在所述程序被所述处理器执行的情况下,所述处理器执行如权利要求1至14中任意一项所述的方法;或者,所述处理器执行如权利要求15至26中任意一项所述的方法。The processor is used to execute the program stored in the processor. When the program is executed by the processor, the processor executes the method as described in any one of claims 1 to 14; or, the processor executes the method as described in any one of claims 15 to 26.
  29. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括逻辑电路和接口,所述逻辑电路与所述接口耦合;A communication device, characterized in that the device comprises a logic circuit and an interface, wherein the logic circuit is coupled to the interface;
    所述接口用于输入和/或输出代码指令,所述逻辑电路用于执行所述代码指令,在所述代码指令被所述逻辑电路执行的情况下,所述逻辑电路执行如权利要求1至14中任意一项所述的方法;或者,所述逻辑电路执行如权利要求15至26中任意一项所述的方法。The interface is used to input and/or output code instructions, and the logic circuit is used to execute the code instructions. When the code instructions are executed by the logic circuit, the logic circuit executes the method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 14; or, the logic circuit executes the method as claimed in any one of claims 15 to 26.
  30. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机存储介质中存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序包括程序指令,在所述程序指令被处理器执行的情况下,所述处理器执行如权利要求1至14中任意一项所述的方法;或者,所述处理器执行如权利要求15至26中任意一项所述的方法。A computer storage medium, characterized in that a computer program is stored in the computer storage medium, and the computer program includes program instructions. When the program instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes the method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 14; or the processor executes the method as claimed in any one of claims 15 to 26.
  31. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或计算机代码,当所述计算机程序或所述计算机代码在计算机上运行时,使得如权利要求1至26中任意一项所述的方法被执行。A computer program product, characterized in that the computer program product comprises a computer program or a computer code, and when the computer program or the computer code is run on a computer, the method according to any one of claims 1 to 26 is executed.
  32. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,包括终端设备和网络设备,所述终端设备用于执行如权利要求1至14中任意一项所述的方法,所述网络设备用于执行如权利要求15至26中任意一项所述的方法。 A communication system, characterized in that it includes a terminal device and a network device, wherein the terminal device is used to execute the method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 14, and the network device is used to execute the method as claimed in any one of claims 15 to 26.
PCT/CN2023/121793 2022-09-30 2023-09-26 Communication method and related product WO2024067648A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202211215713.0A CN117856979A (en) 2022-09-30 2022-09-30 Communication method and related product
CN202211215713.0 2022-09-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024067648A1 true WO2024067648A1 (en) 2024-04-04

Family

ID=90476430

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/121793 WO2024067648A1 (en) 2022-09-30 2023-09-26 Communication method and related product

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117856979A (en)
WO (1) WO2024067648A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20150257132A1 (en) * 2012-09-27 2015-09-10 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for transmitting or receiving reference signal in wireless communication system
CN110392996A (en) * 2017-02-03 2019-10-29 Lg 电子株式会社 The method and device thereof of phase noise are tracked in a wireless communication system
CN111698005A (en) * 2019-03-15 2020-09-22 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for acquiring beam weight
CN114650559A (en) * 2020-12-21 2022-06-21 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Phase information acquisition method, feedback method, device, equipment and storage medium

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20150257132A1 (en) * 2012-09-27 2015-09-10 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for transmitting or receiving reference signal in wireless communication system
CN110392996A (en) * 2017-02-03 2019-10-29 Lg 电子株式会社 The method and device thereof of phase noise are tracked in a wireless communication system
CN111698005A (en) * 2019-03-15 2020-09-22 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for acquiring beam weight
CN114650559A (en) * 2020-12-21 2022-06-21 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Phase information acquisition method, feedback method, device, equipment and storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117856979A (en) 2024-04-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11863252B2 (en) Terminal device capability transmission method, apparatus, and system
EP4167629A1 (en) Measurement reporting method and apparatus
JP6078539B2 (en) Method and apparatus for channel measurement and channel feedback in a multidimensional antenna array
CN113965232A (en) Information feedback method and device
CN111342871A (en) Base station device, user equipment and communication system
WO2019047827A9 (en) Method and device for indicating and determining precoding matrix
WO2019161546A1 (en) Reciprocity based csi reporting configuration
WO2017166977A1 (en) Method and system for acquiring channel state information feedback, and related device
WO2019120070A1 (en) Method and apparatus for acquiring downlink channel information
JP2022554078A (en) Method and apparatus for joint transmission channel state information feedback
WO2021056588A1 (en) Method and device for configuration precoding
CN107529691B (en) Method and device in wireless communication
CN112821929A (en) CSI measuring method and device
EP4213401A1 (en) Information indication method and apparatus
CN110830202A (en) Communication method, device and communication system
WO2024067648A1 (en) Communication method and related product
KR20220087547A (en) Windows FD-Based Mapping to Combination Indicators for PMI Reporting and Usage
US11784853B2 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
CN115053498A (en) Method and device for predicting channel state information
TW202416130A (en) Communication method and related product
CN109600153B (en) Multi-antenna network system and base station, server and signal processing method thereof
WO2023236535A1 (en) Beamforming method and apparatus for channel state information-reference signal (csi-rs), and storage medium
WO2023160456A1 (en) Channel information reporting method and apparatus, and network-side device, terminal and medium
CN114884779B (en) Calibration method, device, apparatus, medium and program product for channel reciprocity
CN115333587B (en) Feedback and receiving method and device for type II port selection codebook

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23870875

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1